anh 8 full

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (996.88 KB, 346 trang )

(1)Date of preparing: 30 /12/ 2013 1/2014. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. Period 55:. 8A1: 2 / 8A2: 3 /1/2014 8A3:3 / 1/2014 8A4: 2 /1/2014. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE. LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue between Lan and a nurse of Bach Mai hospital on the phone for general or detailed information - Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to select the topic covered in the dialogue - Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dialogue + Vocabulary: emergency(n) ; ambulance(n); wound (n); concious(a) ; bleed(v); fall (v); hit(v) ; asleep(a); awake (a) + Structures : - “Will” to make requests, offers and promises - In order to, so as to, … - Future simple b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know how to do in the situations which require first aid. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: book , planning lesson, pictures, cassette, tape b. Students: books, notebooks, prepare the lesson. 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ Check the preparing of the students: book, notebook..

(2) * Warm up: 2’ T introduce the tittle of unit “ khoa hoc so cuu” by ask ss some questions ? Have you ever had an accident that requires first- aid ? Have you ever met any situation ? What did you do at that time * Introduction: In order to know about it we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Getting started - In our life, we are usually in the. Students’ actions 1. Getting started: - Listen to the teacher’s guides. stuations that require first- aid. Now you work in groups of three or four to discuss what you should do in these situations + a girl has a burn on her aim + A boy has a cut on his leg + A girl has a nose bleed + A boy has a bee sting - T go around the class and help ss do and introduce the new words. *. New words. + real thing. - towel (n) khăn. + real thing. - ointment (n) thuốc mỡ. + real thing. - bandage (n) băng. + real thing. - cotton balls (n) cuộn bông. + real thing. - tiger balm (n) dầu cao. + real thing. - ice- bag n) túi đá. - call some groups talk aloud. *. Practice. before the class. * A girl has a burn on her aims. - T correct and give an eg. + I will put the burn under cold water + I will put a cold towel on it.

(3) + I apply some ointment and cover it with a bandage * A boy has a bad cut on his leg + I will wash the cut with alcohol + I cover it with a bandage + I will take him/ her to the clinic * A girl has a nose bleed + I will use some cotton balls to cover her bleeding nose for some minutes + I will let her stand straight and raise her head behind * A boy has a bee sting + I will wash the sting with alcohol then rub some ointment on it. 25’. 2. Listen and read. ?. We have discussed the situation that need first- aid. Have you ever seen a situation that requires ambulance?. ?. - students’ answer. What should we do in that situation? - Now we are going to listen to a conversation about an emergency.. ?. You listen to the tape and answer. *. Answer the questions. the following questions. a. A girl is talking with a nurse on. Who are talking in the. the phone. convesation?. b. The nurse is at Bach Mai hospital.

(4) Where are they? ?. and the girl is on at QT school c. A stduent is hurt because she fell. What happened? Why? ?. off her bike and hit her head on the road d. It’s on Ngo Si Lien Lane. It’s. ?. Where is the school. between QT street and THD street *. New words. - T introduce some new words. - emergency (n) ca cấp cứu. + explain. - ambulance (n) xe cứu thương. + explain. - conscious (a ) còn tỉnh. + explain. - unconscious (a) bất tỉnh. + explain. - cut one’s head: bị vỡ đầu. + explain. - bleading badly: chảy máu nhiều. + explain. - cover the wound: che vết thương. + explain. - hold it tight: giữ chặt. + explain. - fall asleep : ngủ thiếp đi. + explain - guide ss read the new words - Ask ss practice the dialogue in pairs - call some pairs read aloud before the class - T correct their mistakes Introduce some structures in the dialouge.. *. Grammar a. Requests: Can/could/will/would + you + V<bare> ? Sure/OK/All right/Certainly. I’m sorry. I can’t/I’m afraid not. e.g1: Can you get me a bandage ? Sure. Here you are. b. Offers:. Would you like + n ? Would you like me to do st ? Shall I + V<bare> ? Can/May I + V<bare>. ?.

(5) Ask SS to give examples from the structures. Will/Won’t you + V<bare> ? What can I do for you ? Yes, please/That would be nice. No, thank you. e.g2: Would you like a hot drink ? No, thank you. c. Promises:. I promise I will (not) + V<bare> I promise to do st. I hope so/Good/I’m glad/Don’t forget. e.g3: I promise I will come straight home after school. * Exercise 2. Select the topics covered in the dialogue - Ask ss do ex 2 “ selects the topics a. Describing the condition of the injured person. covered in the dialogue about 5 b. Asking for the address. minutes c Asking about the condition of the injured person. - call some ss give the answers e. Giving first-aid instructions. f. Arranging for an ambulance. c. Feed back: 3’ T(?) What happened at Quang Trung school ? What did the nurse tell Lan to do ? Resay the content of the lesson. How to do in the first - aid d. Home work:2’ - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Write an instruction for a bad cut first aid - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ Speak” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(6) Date of preparing: 30 /12/ 2013. Period 56:. Date of teaching: 8A1: 3 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 4 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: / 1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: 4 /1/2014. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 2: SPEAK. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make and respond to requests, offers and promises - Standard: make and respond to requests, offers and promises in the situations in the pictures - Higher: make and respond to requests, offers and promises in some other situations Vocabulary: promise(v); promis(n) ; bandage(n); medicine(n); forget(v). Structures : - “Will”/ Can/ Could/ Would to make requests, offers and promises b. Skills: speaking skills: make and respond to requests, offers and promises c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be helpful 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: book , planning lesson, pictures b. Students: books, notebooks, prepare the lesson. 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ Check the preparing of the students: book, notebook. * Warm up: 2’ - ask ss some questions ? If you have a bad cut on your leg what would you say to request some one to help you ? what would some one say to offer to help you.

(7) ? What are the responds Ss answer - Can you…/ Could you give me…. - Would you like…… - I will…../ Ok…./ Sure…/ I promises * Introduction: In order to know about it we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre - speaking. Students’ actions 1. Structure. - In the first semester, we learned. * Requests:. about the request ,responses to. - Can / could you give me some. requests. Today we will use those. medicine. structures in first- aid situation. - Will/ Would you get me?. - ask ss review the form. + Responses: - Sure. - T listen and write on the board. - Ok. then guide the using of them if. - All right. necessary. - I am sorry, I can * Offers: - would you like… - what can I get for you? - Shall I …. - Will/ Won’t you have…. - Can I get you… + Respones: - Yes, please - That would be nice - No, thank you * Promises: - I will… I promise… - I promise …. I will…. - I promise… I won’t….

(8) - I promise ….to… + Responses: - I hope so - Good - I am glad 20’. 2. While- speaking. - Don’t forget. - Now you work in pairs, use the structures you have learnt to make. - listen to the teacher. responses to the requests for the situations provided in the ex2 - T guides: you study the pictures. - practice in group. and discuss what the people in the picture need + eg: In picture a the boy is holding. - look at an example. his head, perhaps he has a headache. What would you say in this situation? ? How would the boy respond to it - ask ss discuss about 3 minutes. 2. Practice. - Call 2 students give the answers. c. A: Can you get me some. - T correct and give the right. bandage?. + eg: Sister: Shall I get you some Medicine? Boy: - Yes, please - That would be nice - No, I am fine - ask ss to practice in pairs with all parts about 6 minutes - call some pairs speak aloud before the class T correct and give the right answers. B: Sure d. A: Would you like me to get you some medicine? B: That would be nice e. Boy: I promise I won’t play soccer in the house again Mother:- I hope so - Don’t forget.

(9) 5’. 3. Post- speaking. Ex:. - Ask ss practice in pairs “ T give. A girl has a burn on her hand. some situations and ask ss. A boy has a bee sting.. complete” * Situation: - ask ss do about 4 minutes - call some pairs speak aloud before the class - T listen and correct c. Feed back: 3’ - some request, offer, promises and their response - speak English correctly d. Home work:2’ - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ listen” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 2 /1/ 2014. Period 57:. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 3: LISTEN. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge:. 8A1: 8 /1/2014 8A2: 10/1/2014 8A3: 8 / 1/2014 8A4:10 /1/2014.

(10) + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to a text decribing an emergency room in a large hospital and write the order of appearing of the pictures - Standard: Listen to the text and write the order of appearing of the pictures - Higher: answer some questions about the text + Vocabulary: paramedic(n); wheel(v); patient(n) ; push(v); wheelchair(n); eye chart(n); eyesight(n); scale(n); crutch(n). + Structures: The present progressive tense b. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation and arrange the pictures + Speaking: Ask and answer the questions c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay healthy, eat sensibly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: book , planning lesson, pictures b. Students: books, notebooks, prepare the lesson. 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ Check the preparing of the students: book, notebook. * Warm up: 2’ - ask ss some questions ? If you have a bad cut on your leg what would you say to request some one to help you ? what would some one say to offer to help you ? What are the responds Ss answer - Can you…/ Could you give me…. - Would you like…… - I will…../ Ok…./ Sure…/ I promises * Introduction: In order to know about it we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson:.

(11) Time Teacher’s actions 10’ Pre- listening. Students’ actions. Present the new words. 1. Vocabulary:. Explain. paramedic(n) hộ lý. Picture. wheel(v) lăn. Picture. patient(n) bệnh nhân. Picture. push(v) đẩy. Picture. wheelchair(n) xe lăn. Picture. eye chart (n) : bảng đo thị lực. Picture. eyesight (n) thị lực. Picture. scale(n) : cái cân. Picture. crutch(n): cái nạng. Ask ss to repeat the new words in. Repeat the new words in chorus. chorus. Listen and correct by themselves. Ask 3 ss to read and correct the. Observe listen and answer. mistake. Observe and listen. Ask ss to retell the structures of. pairwork. commands Hang the pisture and present the situation: You are going to listen to a text decribing an emergency room in a large hospital and write the order of appearing of the pictures Ask ss to work in pairs to guess the right order of the pictures Ask ss to give out their ideas 10’. 2. Listen:. * While- listening. Listen carefully and check. Play the tape (3times). Listen carefully and write the order. Ask ss to give out their answers on. Compare with a partner. the board. Correct by themselves.

(12) Ask others to remark and correct. Observe and listen carefully. Remark and give out the answers. * Answers: FBADEC Pairwork Listen carefully and check. 10’. * Post- listening. Correct by themselves. Ask ss to ask and answer. * Answers:. 1) What is a paramedic doing?. 1) She is wheeling a patient on a. 2) What is a nurse doing?. stretcher. 3) Where is the eye chart?. 2) She pushing an empty wheelchair. 4) How many letters does the eye. 3) It’s on the wall. chart have?. 4) It has 28 letters. 5) What is a doctor doing?. 5) He is trying to weigh a crying. Ask ss to practice. baby on the scale. Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers c. Feed back: 3’ - some request, offer, promises and their response - speak English correctly d. Home work:2’ - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ read” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 6 /1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 9 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 11/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:10 / 1/2014.

(13) Date of teaching:. Period 58:. 8A4:11 /1/2014. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 4: READ. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand a passage about how to give first aid to the victims in some cases - Standard: Read and choose a correct case for each of the treatments - Higher: Retell the things that they should do in some cases that need first aid + Vocabulary: lye (v); flat (a); force (v) ; lock (v); elevate (v); victim (n); revive (v); overheat (v) ; minimize (v); ease(v); sterile(a). + Structures: Commands to give instructions b. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and check the choose the treatments c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, stay safe and know the ways to give first aid instructions in the home 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: book , planning lesson, pictures, extra - board b. Students: books, notebooks, prepare the lesson. 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ - T write an offer on request for situation + some one has a cut in her leg what does she request some one to help + A boy has a headache what do you offer to help him * Answers: + Could you give me a bandage, please Sure, here you are + Would you like a cup of water? No, thank you + What can I get for you?.

(14) Can you give me some medicine? Ok * Warm up: 2’ - T give a picture on the board. This is a patient What happened with him? What can you do to help him? Do you often meet emergency in your life? Can you tell me some of them? What do you often do in these emergency? * Introduction: In order to know some first aid with some regular emergency we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre- reading. 10. - Ask ss to look at the picture and. Students’ actions. ask ss to listen to teacher’s introduce “ this is a patient. He was painting and this is the first aid to help him” - Ask ss read the passage and pay attention some vocabularies - T introduce some new words 1. New words + explain. - fainting (n) cơn ngất. + explain. - force (v) bắt buộc. + synomym. - elevate>< lower (n) nâng lên>< hạ xuống. + example. - victim (n) nạn nhân. + explain. - revive (v) tỉnh lại. + example. - lieflat (v) nằm duỗi thẳng.

(15) + example. - over heat (v) làm quá nóng. + example. - blanket (n) chăn. + example. - minimize (v) làm giảm đến mức tối thiểu. + example. - tissue (n) mô. + example. - damage (n) sự thiệt hại. + example. - tap (n) vòi nước. + example. - case (v) làm dễ chịu, bớt đau. + example. - sterile (adj) vô trùng. + example. - dreesing (n) đồ băng bó, sự băng. + example. bó. - guide ss read all new words. - shock (n) điện giật, cú sốc. correctly - ask them read about 3 minutes - call some ss read aloud before the class - T listen and correct their miskakes if they don’t pronouce correctly 15. 2. While - reading. 2. Read:. - T read the text one time. Read the text in silent. - ask ss to read the text insilent. Some SS read the text aloud. about 3 minutes - call some ss read aloud before the class. A: painting: a, c, e. - T listen and correct their mistakes. B: shock : b. - ask ss read again and do ex “. C: burn : d. choose a correct case for each of the following streatments in groups “ about 3 minutes - call some ss go on the board to.

(16) write the answer - T corect and give the right answers 10. 3. Post- reading. 3. Further practice. - ask ss do exercise “ underline and rewrite the inappropriate words “. Work in pairs. a. when you get burns you should ease the paint with warm water pack b. When a person gets shocked don’t give him solf drink or alcohol. a. warm – cold. c. In a painting case, you should give the patient a glass of wine. b. solf drink- drugs. when he revives d. If someone get burns you should. c. glass of wine- a cup of tea. cover the burned area with a thick towel. d. towel- sterile dressing. - ask ss do some minutes - call some ss write the answers - T correct and give the right c. Feed back: 3’ What should we do if a person has a burn / is shocked or fainted ? Ss: Answer. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Ss: Listen. d. Home work:2’ - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Do exercises 2, 5,10 in the workbook.

(17) - Prepare for the next lesson “ write” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 8 /1/ 2014. Period 59:. Date of teaching: 8A1: 10 Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /1/2014 /1/2014 / 1/2014 /1/2014. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 5: WRITE. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a thank- you note To a friend. Review the simple tenses and form of an informal letter b. Skills : - Writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be polite 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: Teacher : book , planning , visual aids b. Students: books, notebooks 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 4’.

(18) Do exercise 5 in the work book * key: b. Perhap she called at a flower shop in order to buy some flowers for her friend’s birthday c. Perhap she decided to go by bicycle in order to keep fit d. Perhap the man ran to the telephone booth to call an ambulance in order to take the victim to the hospital * Warm up: 2’ Ask ss answer the teacher’s questions When do we write a thank you letter? Have you ever received or written a thank you note? What do you write in a thank you note? * Introduction: In order to know the way to write a thank you note in English we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- writing. Students’ actions - listen to the teacher. - T explain: In daily life we usually write thank you notes to relatives and friends. In this lesson we will learn how to write a thank you letter. Firstly you look at the letter on page 84. This is the letter Nga. 1. Nga’s letter to Hoa:. sent to Hoa after she left the. a. was. hospital. b. were. - Now, you have to complete this. c. helped. letter , use the correct tense forms. d. came. of the verbs about 4 minutes. e. am. - call some ss give the answers. f. will phone. - T correct and give the right. 2. Write a thank you letter to.

(19) 15. ?. 2. While- writing. your friend:. - Now you write a letter to a friend. Dear Mai,. to express yours thank you. I’d like to say thank you for the. What did your friend give/ send. interesting book you gave me on. you?. my birthday last week.. ?. On what occasion?. It was a wonderful book about. ?. What was/ were it/ they like?. Vietnamese traditions. It helped. ?. How did you feel when you. to make my day much more. received?. meaningful.. ?. How do you feel now?. This week, I have more free time. ?. Do you want to invite your friend. and my family has decided to go. somewhere?. on a picnic to home village on Saturday. Why don’t you join us? We will be very happy to. - ask them to write about 12 minutes - call some ss read the letter aloud. 10. have you along. I will telephone you tonight for details. before the class. I love to see you then. - T listen and check then give an. Your friend,. example. Lan. 3. Post- writing. 3. Free practice. - use the same format to write. Dear Hung,. another letter to another friend for. I have asked some friends of our. other occassions about 4 minutes. old class to come over my house. - call some ss read aloud before the. for a class gathering next week. It. class. falls on October 2. I hope you will. - T listen and corect then give an. be able to come.. example. I am sure that we will have a lot of fun. We are looking forward to seeing you.

(20) Your friend, Mai c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. Simple tenses and how to wrtie a thank you note to a friend. d. Home work: 2’ - Write a thank you note to your friend. - Do the exercises 8 in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ language focus ” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 10 /1/ 2014. Period 60:. Date of teaching: 8A1: 15 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 17/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:15 / 1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:17 /1/2014. UNIT 9. A FIRST – AID COURSE LESSON 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss should be able to review and systemize some main languages of the unit such as, phrasal prepositions “so as to”, “in order to”, simple future tense and requests, offers and promises with “will”. b. Skills: All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate SS to study hard and be friendly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: book , planning , visual aids, computer b. Students: books, notebooks 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ * Questions:.

(21) - Read the letter you write to friend on occasions aloud *. Marks: - Read correctly = 10 ms * Warm up: 1’ Today we will study unit 9 part language focus to help you consolidate grammar structure of simple future offers and requests, structure of in order to/ so as to… In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson:. Time Teacher’s actions 15 1. Consolidation - T write an example on the board. Students’ actions I. Grammar: 1. In order to and so as to Eg: I always keep the window open,. ? ?. Em hãy so sánh mối quan hệ giữa 2. let fresh air in. vế?. = I always keep the window open in. Nếu bỏ in order to / so as to thì. order to / so as to let fresh air in. câu có nghĩa không?. + In order to/ so as to + V- inf: (dùng để chỉ mục đích). - Ask ss look at ex2 in page 86 and. 2. Future tense. read an example. + future simple tense : will/ shall. ?. What tense is used in eg?. : Be going to. ?. Can you retell the form, using of it? + dùng để chỉ hành động xảy ra trong tương lai - Let them pay attention the using of 3. Request, offers, promises “will and shall”. a. Request - Can/ could you…... - Ask ss retell the structure and their - will/ would you… responds. + sure. + all right. + Ok. + I’m sorry. b. Offers - Would you like…..?.

(22) - What can I get for you? + Yes, please c. Promises - I will… I promise…. - I promise. I willl…… + I hope so + Good 5’. 2. Exercises. * B. Exercises:. * Exercise 1. 1. Exercise 1. - you match one part of a sentence. * Answers. in column A with other part in. 1- c Many wrote… on order to/ so. column B, use in order to / so as to. as to inform her…. about 4 minutes. 2 - b Mr Green got up early this. - Call some ss to read aloud the. morning in order to/ so as to get. sentences. to….. - T listen and correct then give the. 3- e My elder brother…. pass the. right answers. final exam 4- a 5- d. 5’. 5’. * Exercise 2. 2. Exercise 2 1- will. 4- shall. 2- will. 5- will. 3- won’t. 6- ‘ll. * Exercise 3. 3. Exercises 3. - Now use the corect form of will/. b. Will you give it to me?. shall to complete the dialogue about c. Will you answer the telephone, 3 minutes. please?. - call some ss give the answers. d. Will you turn on the T.V,. - correct and give the right answers. please Nga? e. Will you pour a glass of water.

(23) - Beside expressing an action in the. for me?. future will can be used to give. f. Will you get me the cushion,. requests. Now look at the picture. please?. and complete the sentences to makes requests of Nga’s grandmother 5’. * Exercise 4. 4. Exercise 4. - Ask ss practice in pairs about 4. b. Will you paint the door, please?. minutes. I will paint the door tomorrow. - call some pairs to read aloud the. c. Will you study harder, please?. dialogue. I will study harder. - To practice more with will and. d. Will you carry the bag for me,. shall in requests, offers and. please?. promise, you do exercise 4, use. Shall I carry the bag for you?. picture to make requests, offers,. e. Will you hang the washing,. promises. please?. - Ask ss to look at the picture, use. Shall I hang the washing for. the verbs in the box and do ex in. you?. pairs about 4 minutes. f. Will you eat the grass, please?. - call some pairs to read their. I will cut the grass for you. sentences c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. In order to/ so as to. Modal will to make requests, offers and promises d. Home work: 2’ - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart - Do again exercises in notebook - Prepare for the next lesson “ Unit 10: getting started + listen and read” REMARKS:.

(24) Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 14/1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 16 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 18/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:17 / 1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:18 /1/2014. Period 61 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to know how we can save natural resources and protect the environment - Standard: Practice the dialogue and answer the sentences - Higher: Ask and answer questions about recyling at home + Vocabulary: mean(v) ; reuse(v); recycle (v); natural resources(n) ; overpackage(v); instead of(prep) + Structures : - Passive forms - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills c. Education:Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the environment 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards b Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm-up: 4’.

(25) Two groups play on the stage. Things you can recyle. can. plastic bag. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 5’ 1. Getting started:. ?. 1.. Students’ actions What should we do to reduce. - As we know, garbage is an. the amount of gabarge we produde?. urgent problem in our society. - discuss and give the answers. What can you do to reduce the. + we should use cloth bags instead of. amout of garbage we produce?. plastic bags.. + we should use… - we should use tree leaves to wrap. - Now work with a partner about. thing. this problem about 3 minutes. - we should use papers to make toys. with some words in the box. - we should use garbage to make. - call some ss give the answers. fertilize. - T listen, correct and give the. - we should use vegetable matter to. right answers. make animal food 2. The dialouge between Miss Blake. 32’. 2. Listen and read. and students of Quang trung school:. - ask ss to look at the logouge in the book in page 89 and answers. - Friends of the Earth. the teacher’s questions ?. Which organization does this logo represent?. ?. What does this organization do? - we have disscused the ways to reduce the amout of garbage in. - Student’s answers.

(26) our life and one of the effective ways is recycling ?. Can you give some examples for. Can, bottles, cloth, papar..... recycling? - now we are going to listen to a representative from “ Friends of the Earth”, Miss Blake talking to students of Qung Trung school about recycling, you listen to the tape and find out the new words in the tape - T play the tape part listen and read in page 89 - T explain some new words. a. New words. - explain. - protect the environment:. - explain. - save natural resouces(v) tiết kiệm nguồn tài nguyên thiên nhiên. - explain. - over packaged (adj) đóng gói quá nhiều. - explain. - representative (n) đại diện. - explain. - package (v) đóng gói. - explain. - though- threw- thrown (v) ném đi. - explain. - matter (n) chất. - guide ss read the new words correctly and fluently - ask ss practice in group the dialogue about 4 minutes - call some groups read aloud before the class - ask ss to pay attention some. - read choral and individually.

(27) structures. b. Structures: * adjective follow by infinitive/ noun clause - That’s easy to say - It’s difficult to remember - I am pleased that you want to know… * Passive forms: Eg: Reduce means not buying products which are overpackaged S S. +. V+ be + PP. O by + O. Repeat the new structures in chorus - ask ss read the dialogue again and answer the questions about 5 minutes - call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right. c. Practice a. Reduce mean not buying products which are over packages b. we can reuse things like envelopes, glass and plastic bottles and old plastic bags c. Recycle means not just throwing things aways . Try and find anouse for them d. we can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like “ Friends of the Earth” going to the local library or asking your family and.

(28) friends or scientific society e. Miss Blake tells Lan that we should not use plastic bags at all because plastic bags are difficult to be distroyed, so the amout of garbage increases * Production Ask ss to play a game: What do. SS answer:. you do at home to reduce the. - Collect things for recycling. garbage?. - Don’t use things which are overpackaged...... c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. Structure and vocabulary. d. Home work: 2’ - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Write a short passage about recycling - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ Speak” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(29) Date of preparing: 14/1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 17 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 21/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:21 / 1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:22 /1/2014. Period 62 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 2.SPEAK 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Give out and reply to the instructions - Higher: Ask some more questions about the talk + Structures: Put them in… We can make it into… We can recyle them… b. Skills: Give out and reply to the instructions c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love their friends, and conserve their friendship 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards b. Students: books, notebooks 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Ask SS to write structure of passive forms in present tenses * Warm-up (1’) What should we do to protect the enviroment? To dicuss this problem we will study in this lesson. Time Teacher’s actions 15’ . Pre- speaking. Students’ actions .Speaking:. - ask ss to look at the pictures in. * Name of things:. page 91 and give name of things in. + paper.

(30) it. + old newspaper. - ask ss to practice in pairs about 3. + clothes. minutes. + shoes. - call some pairs give the answers. + vegetable. - T corect and write on the board. + school bags + can. - You have name the items in the. *. Practice in pairs with the items. pictures. Now you work in pairs and + paper: giấy decide which group each item. + glass: thuy tinh. belong to. + plastic: nhựa. - ask ss do about 8 minutes. + metal: kim loại. - call some ss give the answer. + fabric: vải + leather: da Structure - which groups do clothes belong to ?. - First, introduce the structure in the lesson. + Put them in “ fabric” - What can we do with those clothes? + We can recycle them and make them into paper - Are fruit or leaves “ vegetable mater”? +That’s right - What can we do with it? + we can make it into compost or fertilizes for our fields. 16’. 2. While – speaking. *. Practice. - call some pairs speak aloud before + Paper: paper, old/ newspaper.

(31) the class. book, cardboard, boxes. - T listen and correct their mistakes. +glass: bottles, glasses, jars. if they don’t pronouce correctly. + plastic: plastic bags, plastic bottles. - ask ss decide which group each. + metal: food can, drinking can, tins. item belong to. + vegetable matter: fruit peels, vegetable + fabric: clothes, pieces of materials + leather: shoes, sandals, school bags. 5’. 3. Post- speaking. - Pracrice in pairs. - ask ss to find other objects belong to each group - ask ss do about 5 minutes - call some pairs speak aloud before the class - T correct their mistakes c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. How to protect the environment d. Home work: 1’ - Do exercises 4,5 in the work book - Prepare unit 10 part listen for the next period REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 16/1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 22 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 24/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:22 / 1/2014.

(32) Date of teaching:. 8A4:23 /1/2014. Period 63 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 3: LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Listen to the talk about how to make compost and check the correct answers - Standard: Listen to the talk about how to make compost and check the correct answers - Higher: Ask some more questions about the talk + Vocabulary: compost(n); belong(v); airmail(n); fertilize(v); matter(n); shade( n); heap(n); grain(n). b. Skills: Listen and check the correct answers c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, drafting paper 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Question: Ask SS to speak part read Ex: S1: Which group do clothes belong to? S2: put them in farbric.............. * Warm up : Hang the picture of a garbage and ask ss answer the teacher’s questions What is this? What can you collect these garbage into group then to give them for recycling? What do you know how to make a compost heap?.

(33) * Introduction: In order to know how to make compost to day we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Pre- listening. Students’ actions 1. Listening: How to make compost:. - ask ss discuss in group with the question follow “ How the compost heap is made”? - ask ss do about 4 minutes - T introduce some new words. * New words. + explain. - compost (n) phân xanh. + explain. - heap (n) một đống. + explain. - shade (n) bóng mát. + example. - tea leaves ( n) lá chè. + example. - egg shell (n) vỏ trứng. + picture. - pick (n) cuốc chim. + picture. - shovel (n) cái xẻng. + explain. - moisture (n) độ ẩm. + explain. - condensation (n) sự ngưng tụ. + picture. - grain (n) hạt. - guide ss read the new words correctly and fluently - ask ss read insilent about 3 minutes - call some ss read aloud before the class - T correct their mistakes 15’. 2. While- listening - Now you are going to listen to.

(34) an expert talking about the way to make compost. First, you look at. * Guesing. the questions and have a guess of. a- B. the information in the tape. b- A. - call some ss give the guessing. c- A. - T play the tape 2 or 3 times and. d- B. ask ss listen and answers the. …... questions by choose a or b - ask ss compare the answers with partner - call some ss read aloud the answers - T play the tape again and help ss * Answers find out the answers. a- A. - T give the right answers. b- B c- A d- B. 8’. 3. Post- listening. * Futher practice. - ask ss put these phrases in the order of the compost- making process a. use shovels to turn the compost. 1- b start a compost heap. b. start a compost heap. 2- d. place in the garden. c. water the compost. 3- a. use shovels to turn the compost. d. place in the garden. 4- c. water the compost. e. use as fertilizer. 5- f. keep for six month. f. keep for six month. 6- e. use as fertilizer. - ask ss do about 3 minutes - call some ss give the answers - T listen and corect then give the.

(35) right answers c. Feed back: 1’ Ask SS to resay the way to make compost. d. Home work: 1’ Do exercise 5,6 in the work book Learn by heart the structures and vocabulary. Prepare unit 10 part read for the next period. Guide SS how to do exercises REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 16/1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 23 /1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 25/1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:24 / 1/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:25 /1/2014. Period 64 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 3: READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about how things are recyled - Standard: Read and answer the questions (exercise 1) - Higher : Complete the sentences (exercise 2) + Vocabulary: tire (n); pipe (n); refill (v) ; industry (n); melt (v); deposit (n); dung (n) + Structures: Present perfect, future simple b. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 1) and complete the sentences (exercise 2) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the environment.

(36) 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 4’ Revision : Wordsquare E N V E L O P E R D. N V I R O N M E N T B C G A R B A G E R E D R D O P P U R E J U E Y I L A R S C U S E D P A P E R Y S T N O T S E D E C R O T E C T R U U L A B R C A I B C S E E C E E N C A E E K E E E F G H G I J L Answer key Environment, garbage, pure, used paper, protect. Envelope, dust, green tree, can, plastic paper bag, reduce, reuse, recycle. b. The new lesson:. Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- reading. Students’ actions. - ask ss discuss with some questions ?. What can we do this car, tired, bottles?. ?. How can we make it in to ? - T give some new words. 1. New words. + explain. - pipe (n) ống nước. + explain. - refill (v) đổ đầy. + explain. - deposit (n) tiền đặt cọ. + explain. - melt (v) tan, chảy ra. + explain. - dung (n) phân. - guide ss read new words correctly.

(37) and fluently - now you are going to read an article in the environment page of a newspaper - you read and answer the questions. - Student read and answers the. in your book. questions. - ask ss read the article about 4 minutes 20’. 2. While- reading. 2. Practice. - call some ss read aloud before the. a. People cleaned and refilled empty. class. milk bottles. - ask ss answers all questions about. b. The glass is broken up, melted and. 5 minutes. made into new glass ware. - Call some ss give the answers. c. The Oregon government made a. - T correct and give the right. new law that there must be a deposit on drink cans. The diposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling d. Compost is made from house hold and garden waste e. If we have a recycling story to share, we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 465 - Students answers. - T introduce new grammar structure 3. Grammar structure: passive - T explain by give an example. voice + I do this exercise ( active) + This exercise is done by me. - ask ss change this sentences + The cat eats the mouse. ( passive) The mouse is eaten by the cat.

(38) - ask ss read the passage again and. 4. Answer the questions. do ex 2 in 4 minutes. a. Carvtires are recycled to make. - call some ss give the answers. pipes and floors coverings. - T correct and give the right. b. Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled (with milk) c. Glass is broken up, melted and made into glass ware d. Drinks cans are brought back for recycling e. House hold and garden waste is made into compost. 5’. 3. Post- reading. - Try to read and translate corectly. - Ask ss to translate the text in Vietnamese c. Feed back: 3’ Resay the content of the lesson. ? What things in the house do you collect for recycling? Ex: cans, paper,............ d. Home work: 2’ Do exercise 5,6 in the work book Learn by heart the structures and vocabulary. Prepare unit 10 part write for the next period. Guide SS how to do exercises REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 22/1/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /2/2014.

(39) Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. 8A3: / 2/2014 8A4: /2/2014. Period 65 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 5: WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write an instruction using a model pasage and the given words - Standard: write an instruction using a model pasage and the given words - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the instruction + Vocabulary: soak (v); dry(v); press(v); mixture(n); scatter(v). + Structures: Format of an instruction b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a model pasage - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the instruction c. Education: : Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the environment 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: * Warm up: 4’  Lucky Numbers 1. Lucky Numbers 2. Say this sentence into the passive “People speak English everywhere” 3. Say this sentence in the active “Cartoons are liked by most children” 4. Lucky number.

(40) 5. Lucky number 6. Passive: “We do not use things carefully” 7. Active: “Are candies liked by the children ?” 8. Passive: “Mr Han teaches Maths” Passive:“Vegetarians do not eat meat” b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- writing. Students’ actions. - T introduce: There are many thing s that can be recycled. How ever, not many of us know how these materials are recycled. In this less -on, we will know how to recycle tea leaves and papers into new items - Now you read the passage and complete the recycling instructions use the verbs in the box - ask ss pay attention some new. 1. New words. words. - soak (v) làm thấm nuớc, ngâm. + explain. - dry ( v) phơi khô. + explain. - press (v) ấn. + explain. - bucket (n) thùng xô. + explain. - overnight (adv) qua đêm. + explain. - wooden spoon (n) thìa gỗ. + real object. - mash (v) bóp. + action. - wire mesh ( n) luới sắt. + picture. - mix (v) trộn. + action. - mixture (n) hỗn hợp. + action. - firmly (adv) mạnh, chặt.

(41) + explain. - sunlight (n) ánh nắng. + explain. - scatter (v) rải rắc. + action. - tray (n) khay, mâm. + picture - guide ss read the new words correctly and fluently - call some ss read aloud before the class. 2. Answers. - ask them do exercise about 5. 1- use. 2- mix. minutes. 4- press. 5- wrap. - call some ss give the answers. 6- wait. 7- dry. 3- place. - T correct and give the right answer - call a student read the passage aloud after finishing - T listen and correct their mistakes if they don’t pronouce correctly 15. 2. While- writing - T guide: In some areas people burn dry tea leaves to keep mois – quitoes away - make the directions on how to. 3. Practice. prepare the tea leaves by using the. a. First, take the rsed tea leaves from. pictures and given words in the box. the teapot. - ask ss write individually about 10. b. Next, scatter the tea leaves on a. minutes. tray. - ask them pay attention some new. c. Then, dry the leaves in the sun. words. d. Finally, put the dry leaves in a pot. - call some ss read aloud before the. for future use. class.

(42) - T correct and give the keys 10. 3. Post- writing - Ask ss to practice in groups, discuss and arranges the way to. 4. Further practice. recycle car tires into sandals. a- 3. b- 5. - ask ss do about 3 minutes. c- 1. d- 4. 1- Remove all dirty substances. e- 2. f- 6. 2- put them into the production line 3- collect the old tires and put them in reserve 4- and add some necessary matters 5- melt the tires carefully 6- get the sandals available and introduce them to the market - call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right c. Feed back: 3’ T(?) How can we prepare the tea leaves ? Ss: Answer. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again “How to write instructions on something” Ss: Listen. d. Home work: 2’ - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart - Write again the instruction in the book. - Prepare part language focus - Do exercises 9,10 in the work book. REMARKS:.

(43) Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 2/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 5 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 8/2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:7 / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:8 /2/2014. Period 66 UNIT 10: RECYCLING LESSON 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Passive forms - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - Standard: Write the passive forms of an instruction on how to recyle glass Complete the dialogues using the passive forms in the future tense Complete the dialogues using the adjectives before a noun clause Complete the letter using the the adjectives before a noun clause - Higher : Do some more exercises + Vocabulary: break(v); understand(v); believe(v); follow(v); important(a) mandkind(n); delightted(a); relieved(a) + Structures: - Passive forms b. Skills: All four skills but pay atention to writing and speaking skills c. Education: : Educate ss to learn hard and have good knowledges to protect the environment 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards, flash cards b. Students: review passive forms and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit.

(44) *Warm-up(4’). Ask ss to play the game “Matching” * Matching: build  built show  showed make  made finish  finished wash  washed dry  dried blow  blown b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 5’ 1. Passive forms Introduce the first content of the. Students’ actions 1. Passive forms Listen and tell. lesson through the extra board Ask ss to retell the use, forms of the *Key : passive voice in the commands. Active Passive. V+O+… O + is/are +. V(PII) +… Observe and listen Individualwork Listen and correct Listen and copy 10’. Ask ss to look at the model sentence 2. Exercise 1 and explain the aim * Answers: Ask ss to use the active sentences to 1) The glass is broken into small change into the passive ones pieces Ask some ss to give out their 2) The glass is washed with a answers detergent liquid Remark and correct 3) The glass pieces are completely dried.

(45) 4) They are mixed with certain specific chemicals 5) The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid 6) A long pipe is used, dipped into the liquid, then the liquid is blown into intended shapes Observe, listen and tell S+ will + V + O + … O+ will + be + VPII + +… Ask ss to give the form of the future simple tense. Do on the drafting paper. Give the forms of the passive of the future simple tense. Listen and correct 2. Exercise 2. 10’. Guide ss to do exercise 2. * Answers:. Ask ss to do exercise 2. 1) will..be started?. Ask some ss to give out their. 2) will be showed. answers. 3) will…be built?. Remark and correct. 4) will be finished 5) will…be made? Observe and listen. 8’. *Adjectives. Eg: It’s difficult to follow your. Ask ss to look at the table, the. directions. model sentences and present the aim Present the forms of adjectives followed by an infinitive.

(46) Ask ss to look at the model sentences and guide ss to do the. Do on the drafting paper. exercise Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to Ask ss to read their sentences 8’. Ask ss to correct Remark and give out the answers. 3. Exercise 3 * Keys: 1) It’s easy to understand 2) It’s hard to believe 3) It’s dangerous to go 4) It’s important to wait Observe and listen Eg: Your grandfather and I are delighted that you passed your. Ask ss to look at the letter, the model sentences and present the aim Present the forms of adjectives 8’. followed by a noun clause Ask ss to look at the model sentences and guide ss to do the exercise Ask ss to do on the drafting paper to Ask ss to read their sentences Ask ss to correct. English exam Do on the drafting paper Listen and correct Listen and copy 4. Exercise 4. * Keys: 1) is happy 2) am relieved 3) is afraid 4) are…sure 5) am certain Listen and answer. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the structure of passive forms T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Ss: Listen..

(47) d. Home work: 2’ + Learn by heart all the structures + Do exercises 7,8 in the work book. + Prepare next lesson Unit 11 : getting started + listen and read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 4/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 6 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /2/2014. Period 67 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue and check the sentences - Standard: Practice the dialogue and check the sentences - Higher: Ask and answer questions about the dialogue + Vocabulary: seat(n) ; exciting(a); crop (n); sugar cane(n) + Structures : - “Ed” and “ing” participles - Would/ Do you mind if I…? Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)…? b. Skills:. - Make requests. - Listen and show the way to somewhere - Read and understand the simple advertisements about the places of tourism - Write a story using the pictures and the given words c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their motherland, country. 2. Preparation:.

(48) a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary, a sheet of white paper 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Warm-up (1’) T: Introduces the lesson and writes the title on the board. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 7’ 1.Getting started. Students’ actions 1. Some famous places in Viet. - ask ss to look at the pictures and. Nam:. say the name and places of each. SS say in VN. picture with partner about 3 minutes + Ngo Môn. 30. - call some ss match the places of. + Cảng nhà rồng. interest in VN with their names. + Văn Mieu. - call some ss give the answers. + Vịnh Hạ Long. - T listen and correct then give the. answers. right answers. a- 2. b- 4. 2. Listen and read. c- 1. d- 3. - ask ss listen to the tape part listen and read page 99 about some minutes - Give some questions and let ss answers ? ?. Who are talking in the. - They are Mr and Mrs Jones,. conversation?. Shanon, Hoa, Tim. Where are they?. - They are on the way through a paddy field 2. The dialouge between Hoa and Tim’s family:.

(49) - T introduce some new words. * New words. + explain. - front seat (n) ghế trước. + example. - water buffalo (n)con trâu. + explain. - crop (n) vụ mùa, mùa màng. +example. - corn (n) ngô. + example. -sugar cane (n) cây mía. + explain. - take a photo (v) chụp ảnh. - guide ss read the new words correctly - call some ss read aloud before the class - T listen and correct their mistakes - T introduce new structure ?. Bạn Hoa muốn ông Jonh ngồi lên. * structures. ghế trước bạn đã nói ntn?. a. Polite request: lời yêu cầu lịch sự Would you mind sitting in the front seat?. V- ing. b. Diễn tả yêu cầu đựơc làm gì Would you mind. if I closed the. door? Do you mind. if I turn off the. T.V? c. Trông thấy ai đang làm gì - ask ss to listen to the dialogue. 2 can see a boy riding the water. again. buffalo. - ask them to work in group of five. + see somebody do/ see sb doing. - call some groups to practice. something. reading before the class. 3. Practice. - Now you read the dialogue again. Listen to the dialouge 2 times.

(50) and write T or F for each sentences. Work in groups of five to practice. and correct the false sentences. Some groups practice before class. - call some ss give the answers - T listen, correct and give the right a- T answers. b- T c- F : The Jones family is traveling from the airport in a taxi d- F : There are not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown. - ask ss answers some teacher’s. around Ha Noi. questions. 4. Futher practice. a.Where does Hoa meet Tim ? ? ? ?. b Who does Tim come to Viet Nam. a. Hoa meets Tim at the airport. with. b. Tim comes to VN with his. c. How do they travel to Ha Noi. parents and his sister. d. How long does it take them to. c. They travel to Ha Noi by taxi. get to Ha Noi. d. It takes them 40 minutes. e. What does Tim like to do on the. e. He likes to take a photograph. way to Ha noi ?. T correct and give the right c. Feed back: 3’. - some famous places in VN - some structures: + Would you mind… + See sb do/ doing…. d. Home work: 1’ + Learn by heart all the new words + Make sentences with the structures + Do exercises 1,2,3 in the work book. + Prepare next lesson: Unit 11 : speak.

(51) REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 5/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 7 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 11 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: 11 / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: 12 /2/2014. Period 68 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 2: SPEAK 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Make and reply to the requests and suggestions - Standard: Make and reply to the requests and suggestions - Higher: Ask some more questions about the dialogue Vocabulary: direction(n); starve(v); book(v). Structures: Requests Do you mind + V(ing)…? Would you mind + V(ing)…?. b. Skills: Speaking skills. Suggestions Do you mind if I + V…? Would you mind if I + V(ed)…? How about + V(ing)…? I suggest + V(ing)….

(52) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their homeland 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra boards b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Do exercise 3 page 95 in the work book * Key: a. Would you mind if I turned on the TV? b. Would you mind correcting this composition for me? c. Do you mind if I take a photo of your study corner? d. Do you mind if I give some advice on your study habits? e. Do you mind playing the tape once more? f. Would you mind if I borrowed your dictionary? g. Would you mind if I had a look at your homework? h. Would you ind telling me how you learned English at school? * Introduction: To help you practice with the structure of polite requests we will study in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- speaking. Students’ actions . Speaking:. - help ss review some structure in. 1. Structures. last period. * Polite request. - call a student retell the structure of - Do you mind closing the door? polite request. - Would you mind closing the door? - Do/ would you mind not smoking? + No, I don’t mind + No, of course not + I am sorry I can’t + I am sorry that is not.

(53) possible -> Do / would you mind + V-ing? * Đề nghị được làm gì - Do you mind if I take a photo? - Would you mind if I took a photo? + Not at all 20’. 2. While- speaking. + Please do. - T explain: Now you work in pairs. + Please go ahead. one of you is student A and other is. + I’d prefer you didn’t. student B. Look at the information. -> Would you mind if I + V past. about your role and use it to make. Do you mind if I + V present. request and suggestions 2. Practice S1: You are a tourist on vacation to HCM city, you want to visit these places a market, the zoo, a museum - T ask ss to practice with partner. and a restaurant for lunch. Ask the. about 4 minutes. tourist information officer to suggest. - call some ss talk aloud before the. where you could go, use the. class. expression in the box to help you. - T listen and correct their mistakes. S2: You are a tourist information. if necessary. officer at Sai Gon tourist. A tourist is going to ask you for help. You should make suggestions about which places to visit the following information will help you. - T give some examples. + Eg: a. A: Excuse me. Can you help me? B: Yes, sir. What can I do for you? A: Yes, could you give me some.

(54) information, please? B: Yes, of couse. What information do you want? A: I want to visit a museum. Would you mind suggesting one? B: I suggest you go to the history museum A: That sounds interesting. Do you mind telling me what time it opens B: It opens from 8 a.m to 4 p.m everyday except Monday A: Thank you very much B: You are well come. Have a nice day b. A: Would you mind if I asked you a question? B: No, I don’t mind. What can I help you ? A: I want to visit a market. Do you mind suggesting one? B: Not at all. I suggest going to Ben Thanh market A: No, I don’t want to go there B: How about going to Thai Binh market? A: That sound interesting. Can you tell me what time it opens? B: It opens approximately from 5 a.m to 8 p.m A: Fine, thank you.

(55) B: You are well come. Have a nice day 5’. 3. Post- speaking. - practice in pairs. - Suppose that you meet a tourist who visit your town for the first. SS work in pairs.. time, the tourist want to know some places in your town. You work in. Some pairs practice before class. pairs one of you is the tourist and other is the student of the town. You make up a similar conversation using the places of interest in the town. - call some pairs speak aloud before the class - T listen and correct c. Feed back: 2’ + Would you mind opening…. - Do you mind opening… + Do you mind if I take…. - Would you mind if I took…. - learn about giving direction - structure to ask the way + can you tell me the way to… d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart grammar structures. Do exercises 4,5,6 in the work book. Prepare unit 11 listen REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: ...............................................................................................................

(56) Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 6/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 12 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:15 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:13/ 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:13/2/2014. Period 69 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 3: LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Listen to the dialogue and check the places in the map - Standard: Make and reply to the requests and suggestions Listen to the dialogue and check the places in the map b. Skills: + Listening: Listen and check the places in the map c. Education: : Educate ss to learn hard and love their country, native land 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, tape, cassette, pictures, extra board b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: Test 15’ Test 1: class 8 A1,2,3 I. Change the verbs into past and past participle: do did cut buy see dry stop. done.

(57) live write drive sweep think II. Change the following sentences into passive voice: 1. My mother waters the flowers every day 2. Break the glass into small pieces 3. She will buy a new car. 4. They are cleaning the house 5. People speak English all over the world. * Key: I.Change the verbs into past and past participle: 6 points do did done cut cut cut buy bought bought see saw seen dry dried dried stop stopped stopped live lived lived write wrote written drive drove driven sweep swept swept think thought thought II. Change the following sentences into passive voice: 4 points 1. The flowers are watered by my mother every day 2. He glass is broken into small pieces 3. A new car will be bought by her 4. The house is being cleaned by them 5. English is spoken all over the world. Test 2: class 8A4 I/ Chose the most suitable words or phrases to fill in the blanks. 1. I can see a boy (ride/ riding/ to ride/ rode) a water buffalo. 2. It’s (interesting/ interested/ interestingly/ interestedly) to travel around Viet Nam. 3. Would you mind (to close/ closing/ close/ closed) the windows. 4. She cried (exciting/ excitingly/ excited/ excitedly) when she heard that news. 5. (Could/ Don’t/ Do/ Would) you mind if I smoke? 6. My sister likes sweets (making/ made/ to make/ make) from chocolate. 7. This is the first time Sharron (is seeing/ saw/ see/ has seen) rice paddies. 8. There are lights daily to Ho Chi Minh city (besides/ after/ except/ on) Monday..

(58) II/ Complete the sentences, using the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. The man (sit) ………………… next to me was very nervous. 2. Tom doesn’t enjoy (laugh) ………………at by other people. 3. I’d like you (meet) …………………..my mother. 4. Take this street and you (arrive) ………………….at the bus station in 15 minutes. 5. He suggested (travel) ……………….. around the town by bike. 6. The flights to London will (delay) ………………… because of heavy rain. 7. This is the first time Hoa (meet) Tim’s family. 8. She has a lot of novels (write) ………………….. in English.. * Key: I/ Chose the most suitable words or phrases to fill in the blanks. 1. I can see a boy (ride/ riding/ to ride/ rode) a water buffalo. 2. It’s (interesting/ interested/ interestingly/ interestedly) to travel around Viet Nam. 3. Would you mind (to close/ closing/ close/ closed) the windows. 4. She cried (exciting/ excitingly/ excited/ excitedly) when she heard that news. 5. (Could/ Don’t/ Do/ Would) you mind if I smoke? 6. My sister likes sweets (making/ made/ to make/ make) from chocolate. 7. This is the first time Sharron (is seeing/ saw/ see/ has seen) rice paddies. 8. There are lights daily to Ho Chi Minh city (besides/ after/ except/ on) Monday. II/ Complete the sentences, using the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets.. 1. Sitting. 5. Traveling. 2. Laughing. 6. Be delayed. 3. To meet. 7. Has met. 4. Will arrive. 8. written. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- listening. Students’ actions Look at the map and answer the T’s.

(59) - ask ss to look at the map in the. questions. book and answers the teacher’s questions ?. What do you see in the map? How many roads/ streets/ offices. ?. are there? - T introduce some new words in the lesson. 1. New words. + explain. - highway (n) đường cao tốc. + explain. - tourist information center: trung. + explain. tâm thông tin du lịch. + explain. - bus station: bến xe buýt. + explain. - pagoda (n) chùa. - guide ss read aloud correctly. - temple (n) đền. - T call some ss read again - T listen and correct their mistakes - now you are going to listen to the tape about the position of the places mentioned above on the map. You. - listen and do exercise. study the map and listen to the tape to match the places to their correct positions a, b, c, d or e.which are marked on the map 12’. 2. While- listening - - T play the tape 2 or 3 times - ask ss compare the answers with partners - call some ss give the answers. 2. Practice a. - play the tape again anxd help ss. a. restaurant. find out the right answers. b. hotel.

(60) - T give the right. c. bus station. - T give some questions and ask ss. d. pagoda. answers about 4 minutes. e. temple 3. Practice b. a. What is number a?. a. Number a is a restaurant. b. Where is the bus station?. b. The bus station is opposite the tourist information center. c Where is the restaurant?. c. The restaurant is in HT road. d. Where is the hotel?. d. The hotel is in Phong Lan road. - call some ss give the answers. just off the high- way. - T correct abd give the right 3. Post- listening 5’. * Picture dictation: - Review prepositions: next to, between, in the middle, beside, near,.... - Give sts instructions to draw: 1.There is a lake in the middle of the picture. 2.There is a house to the left of the lake. 3.There are some trees beside the house. 4.To the right of the pond there is a highway. 5.There are some chickens next to the highway. - Let sts listen several times. - Ask them to show their pictures. - Put an empty box on the board and. 4. Further practice SS draw on paper..

(61) have sts draw each instruction individually to check. c. Feed back: 1’ Resay the name of places, prepositions of position. d. Home work: 2’ + Listen again the part listen at home. + Prepare part read for the next period. + Do exercises 5,6,7 in the work book REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 11/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 13 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:18 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:18 / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: 15 /2/2014. Period 70 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 4: READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the advertisement about the resorts in Viet Nam - Standard: Read and check the topic mentioned (exercise 1), then answer the questions - Higher: Answer some more questions (exercise 2) Vocabulary: resort (n); sight (n); accommodation (n); arrival (n); departure (n); stream (n); heritage (n); tribe(n); sunbathe(v) Structures: Present simple b. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2) and check the sentences (exercise 1).

(62) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beautiful sights in their country 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 3’ - ask ss do exercise 1 page 65 in the work book * Answers: - a student arrange then read aloud + a, b, g, e, f, + a, b, d, k, i * Warm up - give out the pictures of some places and ask they know these places Have you ever been there? What is this place famous for? Can you give some information about these places? * Introduction: In order to know more information, today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- reading. Students’ actions 1. New words. - ask ss to look at the reading in the book. T read one time and help them find out the new words + explain. - oceanic institute (n) viện hải. + explain. dương học. + explain. - seaside resort (n) khu nghỉ mát bãi. + explain. biển. + explain. - giant buddha (n) tuợng phật khổng.

(63) + explain. lồ. + explain. - offshore island (n) đảo ngoài khơi. + explain. - accomodation (n) chỗ ăn ở. + explain. - eternal (adj) vĩnh cửu. + explain. - mountain slopes (n) những sườn. + explain. núi. + explain. - slope (n) dốc thoai thoải. + explain. - UNESCO: United Nations. - read and guide ss read the new. Educational Scientific and Cultural. words. Organization: tổ chức giáo dục khoa. - call some ss read aloud before the. học và văn hoá của liên hiệp quốc. class. - world heritage(n) di sản văn hoá. - T listen and correct. thế giới - magnificent (adj) lộng lẫy - cave (n) hang, động - limestone (n) đá vôi listen and repeat after T. 15. 2. While- reading. Some SS read aloud. - ask ss read the advertisement. 2. Practice. again and check the topics. a. Exercise 1. mentioned in the brochures about the resort about 4 minutes. tt. - call some ss to read aloud their answers - T correct and give the right. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10. Nha. Da. Sa pa HA. trang. Lat. v v. v. v. v. v. v. v. v v. long v. v v v. v. v. v v.

(64) 11 12 13 14. v v v. b. Exercise 2 a. Sa Pa - Now you work in small group and. b. Nha Trang. do exercise 2. There are 5 people. c. Nha Rong harbor. who want to go to Viet Nam on. d. Ha Long bay. their holidays. You help them to. e. Da Lat. find the places about 5 minutes - call some ss read aloud before the. * Answer. class. - Andrew should go to Sa Pa. - T correct and give the right. because there are tribal village there. answers - ask ss answer the questions about 2 minutes ? Where should Andrew go? Why? - call a student give the answers - T correct and give the right 10. 3. Post- reading - call some ss read all advertisement aloud before the class - ask ss to translate the text into Viet Nam - T listen and correct c. Feed back: 2’. - some famous places in VN - some structures: + Would you mind… + See sb do/ doing. - try to do.

(65) d. Home work: 2’ - learn by heart the new words, grammar structures and give an example - Do exercises 7,8 in work book - prepare part Write for the next period REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 12/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1:14 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:21 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:19 / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:19/2/2014. Period 71 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 4: WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - “ed” and “ing” participles - Requests with: “Mind” - Standard: Describe the people and the goods in the two pictures(a,b) Complete the requests using the passive forms in the future tense Complete the dialogues using the adjectives before a noun clause Complete the letter using the the adjectives before a noun clause - Higher: Do some more exercises + Vocabulary: cigarette(n); smoke(v); air conditioner(n); put out(v); turn on(v); turn off(v); cancel(v) + Structures: - “ed” and “ing” participles - Requests with: “mind” b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard be polite.

(66) 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 4’ - Give out some cards with some verb phrases and tick on the board. Turn off the light Play soccer. Read this book Drive your car. Do English exercises. ? Ask students to work in pairs to practise speaking. St1 : Would you mind reading this book with me ? St2 : No problem.. * Warm up: 1’ * Introduction: To help you review grammar structures in unit 11, today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- writing - Ask ss answer the teacher’s ?. questions What is the narrative paragraph( viet tuong thuat) - T explain: narration is a kind of writing in which you report events. Narration is used in many different situation. A narrative paragraph is usually organized in time order - To know more about this writing you read the paragraph, answers the questions a. Where did the Browns go last week?. Students’ actions.

(67) b. What was the weather like? - ask ss do about 2 minutes - call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right - Texplain some new words. 1. New words. + explain. - adventure (n) chuyến phiêu lu. + explain. - paddle (v) đạp nước (n) tay chèo. + explain. - canoe (n) ca nô. + explain. - hire (v) thuê. - guide ss read correctly ?. 15. - The above paragraph based on. They use some adverbs of time:. chronological order. Why do you. last week, one afternoon, after…. know?. 2. Exercise 1. 2. While- writing. a. The wind started to blow and. - now you read the next part of the. the rain become heavier. story and complete the sentences in. b. The canoe moved up and down. the correct chronological order. the water. about 10 minutes. c. Shannon dropped her paddle. - call some ss to read aloud their. d. She learn over and tried to pick. sentences. it up. - T correct and give the right. e. The canoes over turned and every one fell into the deep and dangerous water f. A boat appeared and rescued them. - ask ss to look at the picture in your g. The family was very lucky 3. Exercise 2 book. These pictures are about Uyen’s memorable day. You put the a. She had a Math exam on Friday and she got up late events in the correct chronological.

(68) order and complete the story by. b. She realized her alarm clock. using the pictures and words as. did not go off. prompts. e. As she was leaving home it. - ask ss compare the answers with. started to rain heavily. partners. h. Uyen tried to run as fast as she. - call some ss give the answers. could. - T correct and give the right. a. Suddenly she stumbled against a rock( fell on to the road) f. Her school bag went in to a pool and everythings got wet c. Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to her classroom. 10. 3. Post- writing. g. Luckily, Uyen had enough time. Hang the extra board and ask ss to. to finish her exam. ask and answer about the story ?. 1) Did Uyen get up late?. ?. 2) Why did she get up late?. ?. 3) Was the weather bad when she. Pairwork and answer. was leaving home? ?. 4) What happened to her when she ran as fast as she could?. ?. 5) Did she have enough time to finish her exam?. Observe and correct. Ask ss to answer. Correct by themselves. Remark and give out the answers c. Feed back: 2’ Retell the way to write a narrative paragraph in English. d. Home work: 2’ - write a narrative paragraph to retell something you did - Do ex 6,7 in work book.

(69) - prepare part language focus REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 14/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1:19 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:22/2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:20/ 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: 20 /2/2014. Period 72 UNIT 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - “ed” and “ing” participles - Requests with: “Mind” - Standard: Describe the people and the goods in the two pictures(a,b) Complete the requests using the passive forms in the future tense Complete the dialogues using the adjectives before a noun clause Complete the letter using the the adjectives before a noun clause - Higher: Do some more exercises + Vocabulary: cigarette(n); smoke(v); air conditioner(n); put out(v); turn on(v); turn off(v); cancel(v) + Structures: - “ed” and “ing” participles - Requests with: “mind” b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard be polite 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary.

(70) 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 2’ - Give out some cards with some verb phrases and tick on the board. Turn off the light Play soccer. Read this book Do English exercises. Drive your car. ? Ask students to work in pairs to practise speaking. St1 : Would you mind reading this book with me ? St2 : No problem. * Warm up: 1’ * Introduction: To help you review grammar structures in unit 11, today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15 1.Grammar:. Students’ actions I. Grammar:. - T introduce : “ ing” participles”. 1. “ Ing and ed participles” ( phân. phân từ hiện tại còn gọi là phân từ. từ hiện tại và phân từ quá khứ). tác động, chủ động/ “ed. + eg:The boy is my brother. He is. participles” phân từ quá khứ còn. sitting in the room. gọi là phân từ bị động ( bao hàm. The boy sitting in the room is. nghĩa bị động). my brother. - phân từ này được dùng để rút gọn. + These bicycles are very good.. mệnh đề tính ngữ. They are made in Japan. - Ask ss give 2 sentences, using 2 form. The bicycles made in Japan are very good 2. Polite request and suggest. Ask SS to resay the form of polite. + Would you mind if I opened the. requests:. door?. Would/ Do you mind+ V-ing?. + Would you mind sitting in the. Would you mind if I + V ( past). front sit?. Do. + Do you mind if I take a photo?. V ( present). II. Exercises:.

(71) 5. 2. Exercises. 1. Exercise 1. * Exercise 1:. a. The man walking up the stairs is. - Now you do ex 1 “ look at the. Mr Quang. pictures in your book and say who. b. The woman carrying a bag is. each person is as the examples. Miss Lien. - call some ss read the answers. c. The boy standing next to Miss. - T correct and give the right. Lien is Nam d. The boy sitting under the tree is Ba e. The girl standing by the table is Lan f. The girls playing chess are Nga on the right and Hoa on the left. 7. * Exercise 2:. 2. Exercise 2. - Now you do ex 2, use the past. a. The old lamp made in China is. participles of the verbs in the box to five dollars describle the goods for sale in the. b. The doll dressed in red is 2. picture. dollars. - ask ss to compare with partner. c. The toy animals kept in a card. - call some ss read the answers. -board are 10 dollars. - T give the right. d. The flowers wrapped in yellow paper is one dollars e. The truck made from recycled alumium cans is 2 dollars 3. Exercise 3. 7. * Exercise 3:. a. Would you mind moving your. - Ask ss do ex3, work with a partner car? use the words to make and respond. No, of course not. to requests. A check means agree to b. Would you mind putting out the request a cross means do not. your..? ->No, I don’t mind.

(72) agree to the request. c. Would you mind getting me some. - call some pairs speak aloud. coffee?. - T correct and give the right. I am sorry. I am too busy right now d. Would you mind waiting a moment? I am sorry. I can’t. I am already late for work 4. Exercise 4. 5. * Exercise 4:. a. Do you mind if I sit down?. - ask ss to work with a partner, look Please do at the pictures ask questions and. b. Do you mind if I smoked?. give suitable response. I’d rather you didn’t. - call some ss to give the answers. c. Do you mind if I postpone our. - T correct and give the right. meeting? -> Not at all. answer. d. Do you mind if I turn off the radio? I’d rather you didn’t e. Do you mind if I turn on the air conditioner? f. Do you mind if I watch T.V while eating. c. Feed back: 2’ Summary the main grammar structures: + “ Ing and ed participles + Polite requests Ask SS to make sentences d. Home work: 1’ - learn by heart grammar structure the do all exercises again - prepare for next test - Review from unit 9,10,11 REMARKS:.

(73) Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 17/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1:20 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:25 /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:25 / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:22 /2/2014. Period 73: REVISION AND CONSOLIDATION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 9 to Unit 11 + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “personal information” + Structures : - Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and promises - “ in order to / so as to” - Passive forms in commands and future simple - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - “mind” to make requests - “ed” and “ing” participles b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 1’.

(74) * Introduction: To help you review grammar structures in unit 9,10,11, today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions * Review. Students’ actions 1. The simple future tense:. 7’. 1. The simple future tense:. Three groups make and show out. Ask ss to retell the use, forms of their sentences future simple Divide the class into 2 groups and. Ex:. ask ss discuss to make examples with Will you turn on the radio, please? will to make offer, requests and in. I will be at home tomorrow.. future tense.. I promise I will study hard.. Remark and correct 2. “ in order to / so as to” 5’. 2. “ in order to / so as to”. Ask the class to retell the use of “ in Eg: order to / so as to” and make 2 She goes to the market to/ so as to/ examples on the board Remark and correct. in order to buy some flowers I get up early. I don’t want to be late for school. -> I get up early in order not to be late for school.. 10’. 3. Passive forms in commands. 3. Passive forms in commands and. and future simple. future simple Ex: Break the glass into small pieces.. Ask the class to retell the way to. -> Glass is broken into small pieces. change in to passive forms and make Cut down the trees. 3 examples on the board. -> Trees are cut down. Remark and correct. They will paint the house green -> The house will be painted green.

(75) => 7’. Be + V p2. 4. Adjectives followed by an. 4. Adjectives followed by an. infinitive or a noun clause. infinitive or a noun clause. Ask the class to retell the use, form. Ex: I like to watch that film. It is. of adjectives followed by an. interesting.. infinitive or a noun clause Ask SS. -> It is interesting to watch that. to combine 2 sentences into one.. film.. Remark and correct. => S / It + be + adj + to + V Ex2: They are delighted. We are intrested. in. protecting. the. environment. -> They are delighted that we are interested. in. protecting. the. environment. 5’. 5. Would you mind................?. => S + be + adj + that + noun. Ask the class to retell the use, form. clause.. of “mind”and make 2 examples on. 5. Would you mind................?. the board. Do/ Would you mind if I V/. Remark and correct. VP1…? Would/ Do you mind + V(ing)…? Eg: Can you open the window? -> Do/ Would you mind opening the window? - Not at all. Can I sit here? -> Do you mind if I sit here? - Please do Or - Would you mind if I sat here? - Please do.

(76) 6. “ed” and “ing” participles 7’. 6. “ed” and “ing” participles. Listen and answer. Ask the class to retell the use of. The boy is Ba. He is reading a book. - “ed” and “ing” participles. -> The boy reading a book is Ba .. Ask ss to make 2 examples on the. The doll is 5 dollars. It is made in. board. China.. Remark and correct. -> The doll made in China is 5 dollars. c. Feed back: 2’ Summary the main grammar structures: Ask SS to make sentences d. Home work: 1’ - learn by heart grammar structure the do all exercises again - prepare for next test - Review from unit 9,10,11 REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing:. /3/ 2013. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3/2013 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2013 Date of teaching: 8A3: / 3/2013 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2013. Period 74: TEST 45 MINUTES 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss’ vocabulary, grammar and knowledges from unit 9 to unit 11 + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 9 to unit 11.

(77) + Structures: - Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and promises - “ in order to / so as to” - Passive forms - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - “mind” to make requests - “ed” and “ing” participles b. Skills : reading and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be honest. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3.. Matrix of test Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết TNKQ. T. Thông hiểu TNLQ. TL. L Listening:. Vận dụng TN TL. Cộng. KQ. Listen to a. 10câu =. dialouge. 2đ. then answer. = 20 %. the questions ( 5 cau = 2 ) Grammar. Unit 9,10,11. Unit 9, 10, 11. 13câu. and. ( multi choice). ( verb form). = 4đ. vocabulary. 8 câu x 0,25 = 2. 5 cau = 2d. 40 %. đ Reading. Unit 11 traveling around Vietnam ( Answer the questions 4 câu x 0,5) =. 4câu = 2đ = 20%.

(78) 2d Writing. Unit 9,10,11 Rewrite the. Tổng. sentences. 5 câu =. 5 cau = 2. 2đ 20 % 32 c =. 10 câu = 2 đ. 8 câu = 2 đ. 9 câu = 4 d =. d 5 câu = 2. = 20 %. = 20 %. 40 %. đ. 10. = 20 %. =100%. 3. Questions: WRITEN TEST: 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: ................................................................... Class: 8A1 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. A. LISTEN: Listen to the dialouge then answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 2. Is this the first time Hoa has met Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 3. How are they traveling from the airport? ........................................................................................................... 4. What does Tim see? .............................................................................................................. 5. What are grown around Ha Noi? ...................................................................................................................... B. LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1. Would you mind ________I borrowed your dictionary? A. if B. when C. that D. Ø 2. We ________lots of photos on vacation last summer. A. had B. took C. did D. made 3.Would you mind……………………………….. in the front seat of the taxi, Tam? A. to sit B. sit C. to sitting D. sitting.

(79) 4.Would you mind if I……………………………..down the music? It’s too loud. A. turned B. turn C. am turning D. would turn 5.The toys………………………………..in the box are five dollars. A. to be keeping B. keeping C. kept D. keep 6.The boy………………………..over there is one of my close friends at school. A. stand B. stood C. standing D. being stood 7.Ly………………..a day………………………………..remember last year. A. has / to B. had / to C. has / for D. had / for 8.Mai………………………………..soccer at the moment A. will play B. playing C. are playing D. is playing 9.Will you be free tomorrow?_ ……………………………….. A. Yes, please B. Yes, I am C. Yes, I will D. Yes, I do 10.The earth………………………………..around the sun. A. will move B. is moving C. moved D. moves II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1.Lan ...........................................(live) in London since 1990 2. Yould ought to ...............................( practice) speaking English every day 3. We ...................................( meet ) him yesterday. 4. Would you mind if I...................................( smoke) ? 5. I would like ....................................( visit) Thailand. C. READING: Read the passage and answer the questions: The ancient town of Hoi An lies on the River Thu Bon, more than 30 kilometres to the south of Da Nang. Occupied by early western traders. Hoi An was one of the major old-time commercial ports of South Asia in the 16th century. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach, etc. In recent years, Hoi An has become a very popular tourist destination in Vietnam. Importantly, the Committee of the World Heritages of UNESCO officially certified Hoi An as a World Heritage Site in 1999. * Questions: 1. How far is it from Hoi An to Da Nang? …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. What is Hoi An famous for? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Tell some places to visit in Hoi An..

(80) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... 4. When was Hoi An recognized as a World Heritage Site? …………………………………………………………………. D WRITING:. Rewrite the sentences, use the words given in the bracket 1. Can I close the window ?( Do/ would you mind) ……………………………………………………………................................ 2 . I am cleaning the board .( passive) ………………………………………………………………................................ 3. The girl is Nga. She is wearing a blue blouse.( ing- participle) .....................………………………….....……………………………............... 4. We get good marks for test. We are very happy .( adjective + to – infinitive) .........................……………………….….….….................................................. 5.. We bought a new house last year. ( passive) .............................. ......... ... ........................................................................................ Key: I. LISTENING. 2 points (0,5 x 4) 1. There are four people in Tim’s family 2. Yes, it is 3. They are traveling by taxi 4. He sees a boy riding a water buffalo 5. Sugar- canes, rice and corn are grown around Ha Noi II . LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1.A 2.B 3.D 4.A 6. C 7. B 8.D 9.C II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1. Has lived 2. practice 3. met 4. Smoked 5. To visited III. READING: 2 points 1. It’s more than 30 km. 5.C 10.D.

(81) 2. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets 3. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach 4. In 1999 IV. WRITING: 2 points 1. Would you mind closing the window ? 2 . The board is being cleaned by me 3. The girl wearing a blue blouse is Nga. 4.. We are happy to get good marks for test 5..A new house was bought by us last year. WRITEN TEST: 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: ................................................................... Class: 8A2 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. A. LISTEN: Listen to the dialouge then answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 6. Is this the first time Hoa has met Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 7. How are they traveling from the airport? ........................................................................................................... 8. What does Tim see? .............................................................................................................. 9. What are grown around Ha Noi? ...................................................................................................................... B. LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1.Yesterday I………………………………..off a bicycle and hit my head on the road. A. fall B. fell C. fallen D. felt 2.John is interested………………………………..the history of Vietnam. A. on B. at C. in D. about.

(82) 3.Would you mind……………………………….. in the front seat of the taxi, Tam? A. to sit B. sit C. to sitting D. sitting 4.Would you mind if I……………………………..down the music? It’s too loud. A. turned B. turn C. am turning D. would turn 5.The old lamp………………………………..in China is five dollars. A. to be making B. making C. make D. made 6.The boy………………………..over there is one of my close friends at school. A. stand B. stood C. standing D. being stood 7.Ly………………..a day………………………………..remember last year. A. has / to B. had / to C. has / for D. had / for 8.Mary………………………………..with her uncle and anut now. A. will live B. living C. are living D. is living 9.Will you be free tomorrow?_ ……………………………….. A. Yes, please B. Yes, I am C. Yes, I will D. Yes, I do 10.The earth………………………………..around the sun. A. will move B. is moving C. moved D. moves II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1.My. uncle. ...........................................(not. visit). us. since. he ...........................................(move) to the new town. 2. You should ...............................( practice) speaking English every day 3. We ........................ just .............................( finish ) the work 4. Would you mind if I...................................( smoke) ? C. READING: Read the passage and answer the questions: The ancient town of Hoi An lies on the River Thu Bon, more than 30 kilometres to the south of Da Nang. Occupied by early western traders. Hoi An was one of the major old-time commercial ports of South Asia in the 16th century. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach, etc. In recent years, Hoi An has become a very popular tourist destination in Vietnam. Importantly, the Committee of the World Heritages of UNESCO officially certified Hoi An as a World Heritage Site in 1999..

(83) * Questions: 1. How far is it from Hoi An to Da Nang? …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. What is Hoi An famous for? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Tell some places to visit in Hoi An. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... 4. When was Hoi An recognized as a World Heritage Site? …………………………………………………………………. 1. D WRITING:. Rewrite the sentences, use the words given in the bracket 1. Can I use your mobile phone for a minute ?( Do/ would you mind) ……………………………………………………………................................ 2 . Break the glass into small pieces.( passive) ………………………………………………………………................................ 3. The woman is Mrs Nga. She is talking to my teacher.( ing- participle) .....................………………………….....……………………………............... 4. We get good marks for test. We are very happy .( adjective + to – infinitive) .........................……………………….….….….................................................. 5.. We will grow a lot of trees in the parks. ( passive) .............................. ......... ... ...................................................................................... Key: I. LISTENING. 2 points (0,5 x 4) 1. There are four people in Tim’s family 2. Yes, it is 3. They are traveling by taxi 4. He sees a boy riding a water buffalo 5. Sugar- canes, rice and corn are grown around Ha Noi II . LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1.B 2. C 3. D 6. C 7. B 8. D II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1.Hasn’t visited – moved 2. Practice. 4. A 9.C. 5. D 10.D.

(84) 3. Have finished 4. Smoked III. READING: 2 points 5. It’s more than 30 km 6. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets 7. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach 8. In 1999 IV. WRITING: 2 points 1. Would you mind if I used your mobile phone for a minute ? 2 The glass is broken into small pieces 3. The woman talking to my teacher is Mrs Nga 4. We are very happy to get good marks for test 5. a lot of trees will be grown in the parks. WRITEN TEST: 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: ................................................................... Class: 8A3 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. A. LISTEN: Listen to the dialouge then answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 10.Is this the first time Hoa has met Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 11.How are they traveling from the airport? ........................................................................................................... 12.What does Tim see? .............................................................................................................. 13.What are grown around Ha Noi? ...................................................................................................................... B. LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1. Mrs Blake shows people………………………………the environment. D. protecting A. how B. how C. how to.

(85) protect protecting protect 2. People should ………… plastic bag rather than throw them away. A. reuse B. reused C. reusing D. to reuse 3. My alarm clock went ………….wrong the time I wanted. A. of B. on C. off D. go at 4. English ………….. all over the world. A. speak B. is speaking C. to speak D. is spoken 5. What is this door made ………. ? A. of B. to C. in D. on 6. I haven’t met my friends ……… 2 months. A. in B. since C. for D. at 7 . After ………….. the letter, she left it on the table. A. read B. reading C. to read D. readed 8. Would you …………………………….helping me with the washing? A. mind B. like C. show D. please 9. They moved to the big city ............................... well - paying jobs A. in order to get B. For getting C. in order not to get D. So that getting 10. We were delighted ........................... your letter yesterday A. got B. To get C. getting D. get II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1. We ......................................( not see) Nga since Monday. 2. Yould should ...............................( study) harder 3. We ..........................................( finish ) the work 2 hours ago 4. Would you mind...................................( turn) off the lights ? 5. She ...................................( go) to the dentist tomorrow morning. C. READING: Read the passage and answer the questions: The ancient town of Hoi An lies on the River Thu Bon, more than 30 kilometres to the south of Da Nang. Occupied by early western traders. Hoi An was one of the major old-time commercial ports of South Asia in the 16th century. Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach, etc. In recent years, Hoi An has become a very popular tourist destination in Vietnam. Importantly, the Committee of the World Heritages of UNESCO officially certified Hoi An as a World Heritage Site in 1999..

(86) * Questions: 1. How far is Hoi An from Danang? …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. What is Hoi An famous for? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Tell some places to visit in Hoi An. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... 4. When was Hoi An recognized as a World Heritage Site? …………………………………………………………………. D WRITING:. Rewrite the sentences, use the words given in the bracket 1. Could you pass the salt, please ?( Do/ would you mind) ……………………………………………………………................................ 2 . They feed dogs and cats every day.( passive) ………………………………………………………………................................ 3. The student is Nga. She is wearing a blue blouse.( ing- participle) .....................………………………….....……………………………............... 4. They can’t walk home. They are too tired .( adjective + to – infinitive) .........................……………………….….….….................................................. 5.. We will grow a lot of trees in the parks. ( passive) .............................. ......... ... ........................................................................................ Key: I. LISTENING. 2 points (0,5 x 4) 1. There are four people in Tim’s family 2. Yes, it is 3. They are traveling by taxi 4. He sees a boy riding a water buffalo 5. Sugar- canes, rice and corn are grown around Ha Noi II . LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1.C 2.A 3.C 4.D 6. C 7. B 8.A 9.A II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1. Haven’t seen 2. Study. 5.A 10.B.

(87) 3. Finished 4. Turning 5. Will go/ is going III. READING: 2 points 1.It’s more than 30 km 2.Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets 3.Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach 4. In 1999 IV. WRITING: 2 points 1. Would you mind passing the salt ? 2 . The dogs and cats are fed every day 3. The student wearing a blue blouse is Nga. 4.. They are too tired to walk home 5..a lot of trees will be grown in the parks. WRITEN TEST: 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: ................................................................... Class: 8A4 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. A. LISTEN: Listen to the dialouge then answer the questions: 1. How many people are there in Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 14.Is this the first time Hoa has met Tim’s family? .................................................................................................................... 15.How are they traveling from the airport? ........................................................................................................... 16.What does Tim see? .............................................................................................................. 17.What are grown around Ha Noi? ...................................................................................................................... B. LANGUAGE FOCUS:.

(88) I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences. 1.Yesterday I………………………………..off a bicycle and hit my head on the road. A. fall B. fell C. fallen D. felt 2.John is interested………………………………..the history of Vietnam. A. on B. at C. in D. about 3.Would you mind……………………………….. in the front seat of the taxi, Tam? A. to sit B. sit C. to sitting D. sitting 4.Would you mind if I……………………………..down the music? It’s too loud. A. turned B. turn C. am turning D. would turn 5.The old lamp………………………………..in China is five dollars. A. to be making B. making C. make D. made 6.The boy………………………..over there is one of my close friends at school. A. stand B. stood C. standing D. being stood 7.Ly………………..a day………………………………..remember last year. A. has / to B. had / to C. has / for D. had / for 8.Mary………………………………..with her uncle and anut now. A. will live B. living C. are living D. is living 9.Will you be free tomorrow?_ ……………………………….. A. Yes, please B. Yes, I am C. Yes, I will D. Yes, I do 10.The earth………………………………..around the sun. A. will move B. is moving C. moved D. moves II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1.My. uncle. ...........................................(not. visit). us. since. he ...........................................(move) to the new town. 2. Yould should ...............................( practice) speaking English every day 3. We ........................ just .............................( finish ) the work 4. Would you mind if I...................................( smoke) ? C. READING: Read the passage and answer the questions: The ancient town of Hoi An lies on the River Thu Bon, more than 30 kilometres to the south of Da Nang. Occupied by early western traders. Hoi An was one of the major old-time commercial ports of South Asia in the 16th century..

(89) Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets. Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach, etc. In recent years, Hoi An has become a very popular tourist destination in Vietnam. Importantly, the Committee of the World Heritages of UNESCO officially certified Hoi An as a World Heritage Site in 1999. * Questions: 1. How far is Hoi An from Da Nang? …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. What is Hoi An famous for? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Tell some places to visit in Hoi An. ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………... 4. When was Hoi An recognized as a World Heritage Site? …………………………………………………………………. D WRITING:. Rewrite the sentences, use the words given in the bracket 1. Can I use your mobile phone for a minute ?( Do/ would you mind) ……………………………………………………………................................ 2 . I cleaned the board .( passive) ………………………………………………………………................................ 3. The girl is Nga. She is wearing a blue blouse.( ing- participle) .....................………………………….....……………………………............... 4. We get good marks for test. We are very happy .( adjective + to – infinitive) .........................……………………….….….….................................................. 5.. We will buy a new house. ( passive) .............................. ......... ... ........................................................................................ Key: I. LISTENING. 2 points (0,5 x 4) 1. There are four people in Tim’s family 2. Yes, it is 3. They are traveling by taxi 4. He sees a boy riding a water buffalo 5. Sugar- canes, rice and corn are grown around Ha Noi II . LANGUAGE FOCUS: I Cirle the best option (A,B,C or D) to complete the sentences..

(90) 1.B 6. C. 2.C 7. B. 3.D 8.D. 4.A 9.C. 5.D 10.D. II. Give the correct form of verbs below. 1. Hasn’t visited- moved 2. practice 3. have - Finished 4. smoked III. READING: 2 points 1.It’s more than 30 km 2.Hoi An is famous for old temples, pagodas, tiled- roof houses and narrow streets 3.Tourists can visit the relics of Sa Huynh and Cham civilizations. They can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the River Thu Bon, Cua Dai Beach 4. In 1999 IV. WRITING: 2 points 1. Would you mind if I used your mobile phone for a minute ? 2 . The board was cleaned by me 3. The girl wearing a blue blouse is Nga. 4.. We are happy to get good marks for test 5..A new house will be bought by us. Date of preparing: 20/2/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: / 2/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /2/2014. Period 75 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 1 : GETTING STARTED – LISTEN & READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , students will be able to : + Know some symbols and some sighseeings in some countries. + Dentify the polite requestations , invitations...........

(91) Language : 1. Would you like to come and stay with us ? 2. That’s very kind of you but I ....... 3. He is always working . b. Skills: All four skills c. Education SS like learning English. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: Plan the lesson, book, cassette, tape, pictures b. Students: preparing lesson, book, notebook 3. The stage of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 7 1. Warm up:. Students’ actions 1. Travelling around the world :. Ask students to look at those pictures and ask them to work. 1. The United of America.. in groups to match the pictures. 2. Thailand. with the names of those. 3. Australia. countries in the box.. 4. Great Britain 5. Canada 6. Japan.. Ask students to work in pairs to make dialogues with those. Ex : Which country do you want to visit. places like the example.. ?. Call some pairs to practise 8. I’d like to visit Australia. speaking. Why ?. * Presentation:. Because Australian people are. T presents some new words. friendly..

(92) 2. The dialouge between Mrs Smith Ss repeat and say the meaning Ss copy. and Mrs Quyen: * Vocabulary: -include (v) -come over (v): (to come to someone’s house to visit for a short time) -pick s.b up; (to come and get someone. T presens grammar. in your car to drive him/her to a place). T checks voc. -aboard (adv)-in a foreign country Model: Progressive tense with “Always” +He’s always working Rub out and remember (voc) * 1-Making an invitation "”Would you like to come and stay … 2-Accepting an invitaion "”Yes, we’d love … “ 3-Declining an invitation "”That’s very kind of you …” 4-Making a complaint " “Oh dear. He’s always working”. 20. * Practice :. *True/False Predition:. Put the chart on the board and 1/ Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from ask Ss to read the statements. the airport in San Francisco. Ss work in pairs to decide if the 2/ Mrs Smith invites Mrs Quyen and her statements are T or F. husband to say with her while they are in town 3/ Mrs Quyen doesn’t accept Mrs Smith’s invitation b/c she wants to stay with a Vietnamese friend of hers.

(93) 4/ Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for 3 days 5/ Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith’s place for Ss open their books, listen to dinner one night the tape while reading the 6/ Mr Thanh; Mrs Quyen’s husband dialogue on page 112. goes abroad for a bussiness meeting. Ss work in pairs. Answer key. Call on some Ss to give their 1-F " Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith keys. from Hanoi. T corrects. 2-T 3-F " b/c her accommodation is included in her ticket price 4-T 5-F " Only, Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith’s 6-T *Complete. Mrs. Quyen’s. schedule:. (Read 1) Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete Mrs Quyen’s schedule with the information taken from the dialogue. Date. Mon 25. Tue Wed 27 Thur 28. Sched. San. 26 Go. Havin. Leaving. ule. Francisc. -. g. San. o. ing. dinner. Francisc. out. with. o. the Smiths. *Comprehension questions (Read 2) Tell Ss to read the dialogue again. and. pick. out. the. Answer key: a/ No, they won’t. B/c they are coming on a.

(94) statements 8. indicating. the tour, and their accommodation is included. following situations. in the ticket price, so they will stay at the. * Production:. hotel b/ No, he won’t. B/c he will have a. Ss answer the question on page business meeting in the evening that 113. day.. Give feedback and correct. c/ Mrs Smith will pick her up at the hotel. c. Feed back: 1’ Resay the content of the lesson d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart grammar structure. Make examples Do exercise 1,2 in the work book. Prepare unit 12 part speak REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:8 /3/ 2014. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. 8A1: 13/3/2014 8A2:11/3/2014 8A3: 11/3/2014 8A4:12/3/2014. Period 76 UNIT 12 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 2 : SPEAK 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: At the of the lesson ss will be able to understand the language in tourist by structure of words as rate per night - Vocabs: via, rate per night, single - Structure: making an invitation.. b. Skills: Speaking skills c. Education.

(95) SS like learning English. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: Plan the lesson, casstte, tape, pictures b. Students: to be ready 3. The stage of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions:. ạ write the words talk about countries b. read the dialogue again c. write the answers a,b again * Answers: ạ Australia, Thailand, Britain Canada… b. 2 student read aloud c. No, they won’t. Because they are coming on a tour and their accommodation is included on the ticket price so they will stay at the hotel b. nọ they won’t. Because he will have a business meeting in the evening * Warm up:2’ - ask ss answers the questions Do you like traveling? what do you prepare for your trip? What information do you need when you want to travel? What can you say in English? * Introduction: In order to know the way to prepare for your next trip , today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson:.

(96) Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- speaking. Students’ actions I. Speaking:. - Ask ss to look at all information about. 1. New words. plane and hotel in page 114. - via (n) đi qua. - read all of it and find out the new. - rate per night: giá phòng 1. words. đêm. - T introduce the new words. - single (n) phòng đơn. + explain. - double room(n) phòng đôi.

(97) c. Feedback: 3’ T(?) What’s the lesson about ? Ss: Answer T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures + practice speaking + Prepare next lesson. Unit 12 : Listen. + Do exercises 4,5,6 in the work book REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /3/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 77 UNIT 12 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 3 LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the weather reports and fill in the blanks in the table with the information they hear - Standard: Listen and fill in the table - Higher: answer some questions about the weather reports + Vocabulary: temperature(n); centigrade(n) ,degree(n); windy(a); humid(a) = wet(a); snowy(a); cloudy(a); minus (n); centigrade(n); zero(n). + Structures: The future simple tense. b. Skills:.

(98) + Listening: Listen to the weather reports and and fill in the blanks in the table with the information they hear + Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the report c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 3’ - Ask ss answers the questions ? Do you like traveling? - Yes, I do/ No, I don’t ? What do you prepare for your trip? - I prepare… ? What information do you need when you want to travel? - I need… ? What can you say in English? - I can say… * Introduction: In order to know the way to prepare for your next trip , today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- listening - Ask some questions and let them. Students’ actions - Try to listen and answers. answers ? What’s the weather like today. - It’s sunny. ? What the weather like in Spring. - It’s warm in Spring. and summer, winter and fall in Viet. It’s hot in Summer. Nam. It’s cold in the Winter.

(99) It’s cool in the Fall - I like the Spring best. Because it’s ? Which season do you like best?. warm and there are many flowers in. why?. this season. - Now you will listen to a weather forecast. Listen and complete the table with the weather information you hear about the big city in the world. The information includes wether characterities and temprature in the city. 1. New words. - T explain some new words and ask ss to repeat in chorus + explain. - cloudy (adj) có mây. + explain. - dry (adj) khô ráo. + explain. - humid (adj) ẩm ướt. + explain. - snowy (adj) có tuyết. + explain. - windy (adj) có gió. + explain. - minus (adj) ẩm. + explain. - minus degree (n) độ âm. + explain. - zero degree: 0 độ. + explain. - degree centigrate: độ C. + explain. - degree (n) độ. + explain. - centigrate (adj) bách phân. - Read and guide ss read correctly and fluently - Call some ss read aloud before the class - T listen and correct their mistakes if they don’t pronouce correctly. 2. Practice. City. Weather Temper.

(100) 20’. 2. While- listening - T play the tape 2 times ask ss listen and fill in the blanks with information. 1.Sydney. Dry,. 2. Tokyo. windy Dry,. 15. 22. 3.London. windy Humid,. -3. 7. 4. Bang-. cold Warm,. 24. 32. Kok 5. New-. dry Windy,. 8. 15. York 6. Paris. cloudy Cold,. 10. 16. - Ask ss to compare the answers with partner about 2 minutes - Call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right while play the tape third. 8’. 3. Post- listening Ask ss to ask and answer What will the weather be like in Sydney/ / Tokyo/ London/ Paris? Ask ss to practice. ature low high 20 26. dry - Practice in groups * Answers: - It will be dry and windy with the low of 20 degrees and the high of 26 degrees. Ask others to remark and correct Remark and give out the answers - Ask ss to write the weather forecast of big cities in Viet Nam - Ask ss work in group about 4 minutes - Call some group read aloud their weather forecast - T listen and correct their mistakes c. Feed back: 2’ - The words and structures about the weather broadcast.

(101) - Repeat the form to discuss about the itinerary and make the plan d. Home work 2’ - Learn by heart the new words, write a weather forecast for tomorrow - Prepare part Read - Write a itinerary about your next trip REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: /3/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 78. UNIT 12 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 4. READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the postcards about Mrs. Quyen’s vacation in the USA - Standard: Read and fill in the table and answer the questions - Higher: Retell the Mrs. Quyen’s itinerary + Vocabulary: lava (n); wharf (n); volcano (n) ; valley (n); wine-growing (n); island (n); carve (v); situate (v). + Structures: past simple tense b. Skills : Reading-comprehension skills: fill in the table and answer the questions c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty 2. Preparation:.

(102) a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ a.Write the new words talk about the weather b. Read aloud all of them * Answers: a - cloudy (adj) - dry (adj) - humid (adj) - snowy (adj) - windy (adj) - minus (adj) - minus degree (n) - zero degree: - degree centigrate: - degree (n) - centigrate (adj) b. A student read aloud before the class * Warm up ? Have you known the famous places in America? + Yes, I have - Hawai - The state of liberty - Chicago - San Francisco + Hawai is… ? Can you tell me some informations about them * Introduction: In order to know them , today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- reading - Ask ss answer some teacher’s. Students’ actions - Listen and answers:. questions ?. Do you remember Mrs Quyen?. - Yes, I do. ?. Where did she travel?. - She travels to the USA. ?. What did she do on her tour?. - She visited volcano….

(103) - T introduce: Mrs Quyen and her husband went on a holiday to the USA. They visited a lot of famous places of interest - Now, you look at the picture and guess. - Student’s answers. Which places did she visit? - T explain some new words. 1. New words. + explain. - volcano (n) núi lửa. + explain. - lava (n) dung nham. + explain. - pour out (v) phun trào, tuân ra. + explain. - over head (adv) phía trên đầu. + explain. - fish man’s wharf (n) bến cảng. + explain. ngư phủ. + explain. - Napa valley (n) thung lũng NaPa. + explain. - wine- growing (adj) trồng nho. + explain. - prison (n) nhà tù. + explain. - carve (v) chạm khắc. + explain. - rock (n) đá. + explain. - wharf (n) cầu cảng, cầu tàu. - T read and guide ss read correctly - Call some ss read aloud before the class - T listen and correct their mistakes if necessary 20’. 2. While- reading T guide: our reading is the post-. - Listen to the teacher’s guide. cards that Mrs Quyen gave her. 2. Practice. children. Now you read and do ex1. a. Exercise 1. “ write what Mrs Quyen did and. a. Hawai: went swimming, visited.

(104) saw in each of these places”. Kilauea Volcano. - Have ss do about 4 minutes. b. New York: went shopping,. - Call some ss give the answers. bought lots of souvenirn. - T correct and give the right. c. Chicago: saw lake Michigan d. Mount Rush more: saw the heads of four American President e. San Francisco: visited fishes man’s wharf, the Napa valley wine- growing area and the Alcatraz prison b. Exercise 2. - Now you read the post cards again a. She took a small plane to and answers the questions in pairs. Kilauea volcano. about 5 minutes. b. She went there by plane. - Call some ss give the answers. c. She saw the famous prison on. - T correct and give the rights. the Island of Alcatraz in the middle of San Francisco Bay d. It is a mount where the heads of four America presidents are carved into the rock e. The other name of Chicago is the “ The windy city” f. She went shopping. 7’. 3. Post- reading. 4. Futher practice. - Ask ss do ex “ write T or F for the following sentences about 3 minutes a. The Mount Rushmore has a picture of 3 American President’s heads b. The Emprire State Building is in. a- T.

(105) New York. b- F. c. Chicago is on the Island of Alcatraz. c- F. d. They saw volcano on Hawaiian Island. d- T. - Call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right answers c. Feed back: 2’ ? Which places did Mrs. Quyen visit? ? What did she do in these places? d. Home work 1’ - Learn by heart the new words, read and translate the text into Vietnamese - Prepare part write - Do exercises 5,6,7 in the work book. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 15 /3/ 2014 3//2014. Date of teaching:. 8A1:20 /. Date of teaching: 8A2:18 /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:18 /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:19 /3/2014. Period 79. UNIT 12 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 5. WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge:.

(106) + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a postcard to a friend about their trip using word cues and the model postcard - Standard: write the postcard using word cues and the the model postcard - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the postcard + Vocabulary: wonderful (a); complain(v); suitcase(n); hospitable(a); relative(n). + Structures: Structure of writing a postcard the position Past simle tense Present perfect tense “ to buy something for someone” b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model postcard - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the postcard c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be friendly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions Read the passage aloud and translate in to Vietnamese answers the questions * Answers: A student read and translate. Then answer the questions . a. She took a small plane to Kilauea volcano b. She went there by plane * Warm up - T give out a post card and ask ss some questions ? What is it - It’s a postcard ? Have you ever sent a post card to your friend or family when you are away.

(107) - Yes, I have/ No, I haven’t ? What did you write on the post cards - I wrote… * Introduction: In order to know them , today we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Pre- writing. Students’ actions. - In this lesson we will learn how to. 1. Complete th postcard Mrs.. write on a post cards. First you. Quyen sent from the USA:. look at the post card that Mrs. 1- in. Quyen sent to Viet Nam from the. 2- people. USA. Read and complete the space. 3- weather. with suitable words about 4 minutes 4- visited - Call some ss to read aloud the post 5- her card. 6- nice. - T listen and correct the give the. 7- bought. right. 8- for. - Ask ss read the post card again. 9- heaviness. and answers the teacher’s questions. 10- soon + place: name of the.. + How do you fell about the people… + What the weather is like… + Who you meet/ see... 14’. ? What information do you need to. + What you see... write a postcard. + What you buy…. 2. While- writing - Now you imagine you are a tourist on vacation in a certain place/ city.

(108) in Viet Nam. 2. Keys. - write a postcad to a friend about. Dear John,. your trip you need to cover the. I am having a wonderful time in Ha. information about. Long Bay. The people are very. - Have ss write about 8 minutes. hospitable and friendly. We are. - call some ss read aloud their. lucky the weather has been fine and. postcard. sunny.. - T listen and correct their mostakes. I saw a lot of caves here. They are. if necessary. really beautiful. I bought lots of. T give an example. souvenirs and a book about Ha Long Bay See you soon Your friend,. 8’. 3. Post- writing - now you work in pairs use the. Peter 3. Further practice. information of a partner to ask some questions about her trip about 4 minutes ? Where did you visit. a- I visited Ha Long Bay. ? What are the people like. b- They are friendly and hospitable. ? What was the weather like. c- The weather was fine and cool. ? what did you buy. d- I bought lots of souvernirs and. - call some pairs speak aloud before book the class - T listen and correct then give the right c. Feed back: 2’ The information needed in writing a postcard. + place: name of the.. + How do you fell about the people….

(109) + What the weather is like… + Who you meet/ see.. + What you see.. + What you buy… d. Home work 1’ - Learn by heart the new words, read and translate the text into Vietnamese - Prepare part language focus - Do exercises 8,9 in the work book. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 15 /3/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 22 /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 19 /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:20 /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:22 /3/2014. Period 80. UNIT 12 VACATION ABROAD Lesson 6. LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Past progressive tense with “while” and “when” - Present progressive tense with “always” - Standard: Complete the sentences using the pictures Match the half sentences Complete the dialogues using the reflexive pronouns Write sentences using the words and the pictures - Higher : Ask and answer some more questions.

(110) + Vocabulary: mailman(n); race (n); drum(n); crowd(n); cheer(v); ring(v); lose(v) + Structures: Progressive tenses b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be friendly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions Write structures of past progressive tense.Give examples *Answer: (+) S + were/ was + V-ing (-) S + were/ was + not + V-ing. (?) Were/ was + S + Ving? Yes,S + were/ was No, S + were/ was + not Ex: I was watching TV at 8 o’clock last night. * Introduction: In order to review grammar structures we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Consolidation. Students’ actions 1. The past progressive tense. - T give an example to guide. + eg:. ?. What tense is this sentences ?. Hoa is doing her home work now. ?. Why do you know?. - the simple present progressive. - T give other eg and ask ss to. tense. compare and find out the tense. - There are “is, doing, now”. Which tense is this sentences in ?. + eg:. ?.

(111) why?. (+) I was watching a film on T.V at 8 p.m yesterday (-) I was not watching a film on T.V at 8 p.m yesterday (?) Were you watching a film on. ?. What is it used?. T.V at 8 p.m yesterday Yes, I was. Ex: I was reading book at this time. No, I was not. yesterday. * Using:. When I came, he was playing video. - Diễn tả 1 hành động đang xảy ra. games.. vào 1 thời điểm xác định trong quá. While he was playing games, I. khứ. came. - Một hành động đang xảy ra thì một. While my mother was cooking, my. hành động khác xen vào. Dùng với. father was watching TV. liên từ when, while - Hai hay nhiều hành động cùng xảy. - Ask ss pay attention some notes. ra song song dùng với liên từ while. by give an example and the using of them 22’. 2. The present progressive tense with “ always”. - T explains: Besides expressing an. + eg:. action that is progress at the present. They are always coming late The present progressive tense can. He is always forgetting his friend’s. express a complaint by using. birthday. always 3. Exercise1 2. Exercises. +eg:. - Guide ss do ex1 “ look at the. S1: What was Hoa doing at 8. pictures and say what each person. o’clock last night. was doing at 8 o’clock last night”. S2: She was having dinner at 8.

(112) - ask ss to practice in pairs about 4. o’clock last night. minutes. * answers: a. Ba was taking a shower at 8…. - call some pairs read aloud before. b. Hoa was having dinner at... the class. c. Bao was reading a comic at…. - T correct and give the right. d. Nga was writing a letter at… e. Na was walking with her dog… f. Lan was talking to her grand -mother… 4. Exercise 2 a- C : The Le family was sleeping. - Ask ss do ex 2 “ look at the picture when the mailman came then match the half sentences in. b-F : while Hoa was eating, the. column A to those in column B.. phone rang. Write the full sentences in your. c- E : When Nam won the race the. exercise book about 4 minutes”. crowd was cheering. - call some ss match. d- B : Mrs Thoa was cooking when. - T correct and give right. Tuan arrived home e- D : when Lan arrived at school, the school drum was sounding f- A : It was raining when the plane got to Ha Noi 5. Exercise 3 a. Bao is always forgetting his home. - Now you do ex 3 “ look at the. work. pictures and write the sentences say. b. Mrs Nga is always losing her. what the people are always doing”. umbrella. - Call some ss read the answer. c. Mr and Mrs Thanh are always.

(113) aloud. missing the bus. - T correct and give the right. d. Nam is always watching T.V e. Na is always talking on the phone f. Lien is always going out. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. Ask SS to make sentences. + Past progressive tense. + Present progressive tense with always. d. Home work 1’ - Learn by heart grammar structures. Make sentences. - Do exercises 10 in the work book. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 8/3/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1:13/3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: 20/3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: 13/3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4:13 /3/2014. Period 81: 45 MINUTE TEST CORRECTION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 9 to unit 11 + Structures: - Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and promises.

(114) - “ in order to / so as to” - Passive forms in commands and future simple - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - “mind” to make requests - “ed” and “ing” participles b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: give points to the tests b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ b. The new lesson: I. Comments (5’) T: Gives comments on students’ tests and turns out the papers to them. Ss: Listen and look through the papers. T: Asks Ss if they have any more ideas. Ss: Answer. II. Discussion (5’) T: Divides class into groups to discuss the answers with each other in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. III. Correction (30’) T: Calls on some Ss to write the answers on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) What do you think about it ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Shows Ss the answer key of the test. Ss: Look and write it in their notebooks if necessary. c. Feed back: 2’.

(115) T: Summarizes the main languages mentioned/available in the test orally once again and encourages Ss to try harder. d. Home work: 2’ Review grammar structures in the test and try to do the test again Prepare unit 13 getting started + listen and read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 10/ 3// 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: 14 /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 82. UNIT 13. FESTIVALS GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue between Ba and Liz about the rice cooking contest then check the T or F sentences - Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to check the sentences - Higher: Write a mindmap about the festival + Vocabulary: competition(n); fetch(v); upset(a); yell(v); urge(v); bamboo(n); team(n); participate(v); make a fire(v); traditional(a); rub(v); separate(v); husk(n); judge(n); award(v); council leader(n) + Structures : - Compound nouns: rice cooking contest… - Passive form in present perfect tense - Reported speech b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to listening and reading skills.

(116) c. Education: SS have more knowledge about traditional festivals in VN 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Questions - write 2 sentences using the past progressive and the present progressive tense with always * Answers: + I was watching a film on T.V at 8 p.m yesterday + She is always forgetting her friend’s birthday - have ss give the name of festival in Viet Nam + Tet holiday + mid- fall festival + DaLat flowers festival * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 5’ 1. Getting started. ?. Students’ actions I. Getting started. - Have ss discuss in group. Imagine. Answers. that we have 5 friends coming to. 1. Tom should go to beautiful. Viet Nam from different countries.. beaches like Do Son, Sam Son in. Each person has a hobby you work. the North and Nha Trang, Vung. in groups and answer the questions. Tau in the South. Where should they go on their visit. 2. David should go to the ancient. in Viet Nam? Why?. city of Hue or the old streets in. - Ask ss do abut 3 minutes. HA Noi. - Call some ss give the answers. 3. Kuckleberry should go to Sa Pa. - T correct and give the right. or Yen Tu mountain.

(117) 4. Oliver should go to traditional potterry villages like Bat Trang pottery village in Ha Noi or some village in Binh Duong and Ninh Thuan provinces in the South 5. Robinson should go to HCM or Ha Noi big cities in Viet Nam 30’. 2. Listen and read. 2. Listen and read:. - T guide: we have discussed the. - listen to the teacher’s guides. tourist attractions in Viet Nam. One of the reasons that attracts tourists is the traditional festival - ask ss to look at part listen and read in page 121 and answers the teacher’s questions Who are they in the pictures. - They are…. What are they doing. - They are playing... - T introduce the new words. *. New words. + picture. - rice- cooking festival (n) hội thi nấu cơm. + explain. - water- fetching contest: hội thi lấy nước. + explain. - fire- making: hội thi nhóm lửa. + explain. - yell (v) la hét. + explain. - rub (v) chà sát. + explain. - husk (n) vỏ trấu 3. practice. - read and guide ss read. a. Exercise 1. - call some ss read aloud - T listen and correct their mistakes. contests. What they do.

(118) - T play the tape part 2 one time and. Wate- fetching. - run to the river. ask ss listen. bank to take one. - Ask ss practice in pairs some. bottle of water. minutes. and return to the. - call some ss read aloud before the. starting position Rub pieces of. Fire- making. class - T correct. bambo together. - ask ss read again and complete the. to make fire Separate the. following table about 4 minutes contests. Rice- cooking. husk and then. What they do. … … - call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right - Ask ss read again and do ex b - call some ssgive the right - T correct and give the keys. cook the rice b. Exercise 2 a- F : only one members… b- F : one person has to collect one bottle c- T d- F : pieces of bamboo are used to make fire e- F: In the final contest, the judges taste the rice f- T 4. Grammar structure “. - Have ss pay attentions some structures - Ask ss find out some festivals in Viet Nam - call some ss give an example - T correct and give the right c. Feed back: 4’. compound noun” - rice- cooking festival - water - fetching competion N. V- ing.

(119) - some name of traditional festival in Viet Nam such as: water fetching, fire making. d. Home work: 1’ - learn by heart the new words, structure and give an example for each - read and translate in to Viet Namese - prepare part speak and listen REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 12. /3/ 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 83. UNIT 13 FESTIVALS SPEAK + LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: At the of the lesson ss will be able to know the way to preparation for Tet holiday and other festival in Viet Nam - vocabs: tidy the room, peach plossoms, a bunch of flower… - Structure: compound noun b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and listening skills c. Education: SS like learning English. Educate ss to learn hard and to be helpful and tidy 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson:.

(120) a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 4’ Have ss play” activities classification about some activities preparation for Tet” - call some group come to the board and give the answers * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 20’ 1. Speak. Students’ actions 1. Speak:. - ask ss answer some questions. + clearn the house. ?. What do you always do before Tet. + decorate the house. ?. What is the most important to. + hang picture. prepare for Tet. + remove old wall papers + buy cakes, jams… - decorate,clearn the house. - T guide: Mrs Quyen ans Lan are. - student’s answers. prepare for Tet. You now work in. 1. Exercise 1. pairs rearrange their sentences in. 1- A. 6- J. the correct order to make a. 2- F. 7- B. complete dialogue. 3- C. 8- G. - call some pairs read aloud the. 4- H. 9- E. dialogue. 5- D. 10- T. - T correct and give keys - T explain some new words. * New words. - T introduce: Now you work in. - pomegrankes (n) quả lựu. pairs make a similar dialogue for. - Swettie (v) con yêu. one of the following festivals + a village festivals:. 2. Exercise 2. + a school festivals: + a spring festivals:. A: You see all the students in our. + a harvest festivals:. school are actively preparing for our school festival. What have you had.

(121) + a flower festivals:. in mind for this important event. -Ask ss do about 5 minutes. B: Sure. It is very important because. - call some pairs speak aloud before it is the 40th founding anniversary of the class. our classroom first. - T correct and give an example. A: I think we should decorate our classroom first B: That’s right. We will clean all the windows, cover the teacher’s table with the plastic towel 2. Listen:. 18’. 2. Listen. 1. Things for Tet. - ask ss to discuss with following ? ?. questions. - Food: Chung cakes, candies,dried. What kinds of food do we have to. water, melon seeds (hat dua), jam. prepare for Tet. (mut). What kinds of fruits do we have to. - Fruit: banana, grape fruit….. prepare for Tet ? ?. What kinds of flowers do we have. - Flowers: peach blossoms ( hoa. to prepare for Tet. dao), apicot blossoms ( hoa mai),. How is the Robinson. marigold ( cuc van tho). - Now, we are going to listen to a. 2. Practice. conversation between Mr and Mrs Robinson and Liz about their. a. Exercise 1. preparation for Tet. You listen to. 1- flower market. the tape and complete the sentences. 2- traditional. - T play the tape 2 times part listen. 3- dried watermelon seeds. page 124. Ask ss listen and. 4- make. complete the sentences. b. Exercise 2. - call some ss read aloud the. - Mr Robinson: go to the flower. answers. market to by peach blossom and a.

(122) - T play the tape again and give the. bunch of marigold. keys. - Liz: go to the market to buy. - Now you listen to the tape again. some candies and a packet of. and complete the things to do note. dried water melon seeds. of the Robinson before Tet. - Mrs Robinson: go to Mr Nga’s to. - ask ss compare with partner. learn how to make spring rolls. - call some ss read aloud things which the Robinsons family preparation for Tet - I give the keys c. Feed back: 2’ What do the Robinsons do to prepare for Tet ? Ss: Answer. T(?) What do you think about it ? T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work 1’ - write all things to do preparation for Tet - prepare part read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 12/ 3// 2014 Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. 84 UNIT 13 FESTIVALS READ. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the appearing origins of the Christmas specials.

(123) - Standard: Read and fill in the table and answer the questions - Higher: Write a mindmap about the Christmas + Vocabulary: decorate (v); custom (n); spread (v); design (v); throughout(prep); description (n); perform (v); suitable(a) ≠ suitable (a) ; poem (v); professor(n); base (v) + on sth + Structures: - Past simple tense - To have someone do something (passive voice) b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to reading skills c. Education:. Educate ss to learn hard, love and conserve the good. traditions 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Talk about your preparations for Tet. Use the cues below. - Clean and decorate house - Buy flowers, candies, wine, tea, etc - Make sticky rice cake, jam. Begin with; As you know, the Lunar New Year or Tet is an annual festival of the Vietnamese. It usually falls in late January or early February. … Answer key: As you know, the Lunar New Year or Tet is an annual festival of the Vietnamese. It usually falls in late January or early February. And as a rule, about two weeks before Tet comes, I always spend time cleaning and decorating my house. Then I go to the market to buy flowers, candies, wine, tea and a lot other things. Next, I make sticky rice cake, jam and some other special foods to treat my friends and relatives when they come for greetings on the New Year’s Days. * Warm-up (1’) What festival is held on December 24 ?.

(124) * Introduction: To know more about the Chrismas will study in this lessson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Pre- reading. Students’ actions. - Have ss play “ Brain storming” discussing about noel about 4 minutes - call some groups give the answers - T summerize and write on the board and introduce the new words. 1. New words. + picture. - christmas carols: bài thánh ca. + picture. mừng giáng sinh. + explain. - Santa Clause: ông già noel. + picture. - Patron Saint: thánh bảo hộ. + explain. Perform (v): biểu diễn. + explain. Design (v): thiết kế. + explain. Custom (n): phong tục, tập quán. + explain. Christmas Eve (n): đêm Giáng sinh. + explain. Jolly (adj): vui tính Spread (v): lan rộng Base on (v): dựa trên. - read and guide ss read corrrectly - call some ss read again - T listen and correct their mistakes if neccesary 20’. 2. While- reading. 2. Practice. - T guide: we are going to read. a. exercise 1. about christmas you read the text and complete the table about the history and origins of some. Christmas. Place of. specials. origin. date.

(125) christmas specials. The. - Have ss compare with partner. christmas. - call some ss read aloud the. tree Christmas. answers and explain - T give the keys. Riga. 1500s England. Mid-. card. 19th. Christmas. No-. centuary 800. carols. information. years. USA. ago 1823. Santa - ask ss to read again and answer the. Early. Clause. questions in ex 2 - call some ss give keys. b. Exercise 2. T correct and give the right answers a. More than a century ago b. He wanted to send christmass greeting to his friendcs c. 800 years ago d. An American professor clement clarke Moore - call some ss read the passage. e. On the description of Saint. again and T explain some new. Nicholas in professor Moore’s. words. Poem 3. Futher practice. 7’. 3. Post- reading. * Answers. - ask ss to listen and complete the song a. we wish you are Merry Christmas we wish you are Merry Christmas b. we wish you are Merry Christmas and a (1)………….New Years c. Good tidings we…(2)…………. .. 1- happy.

(126) d. Good tidings for……(3)……. 2- bring. ………and a happy New Years e. Oh, bring us a figgy padding and. 3- christmas. a…(4)…………..of good cheer. Refrain f. We won’t go until we get some. 4- cap. …(5)…………bring some out here. Refram g. We wish you a Merry Chirstmas. 5- so. and happy new year - call some ss give the answers - T correst and give the right. Turn on the tape and have SS sing the song. c. Feed back: 2’ When did Christmas first appear ? What do we usually prepare for Christmas ? What do we call the fat jolly man in red who gives children presents at Christmas ? What do we call the songs performed at Christmas ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages orally once again. d. Home work 1’ - Review the lesson - Exercise 5,6. - Prepare for the next one. REMARKS: Time: ...................................................................................................................

(127) Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 85. UNIT 13 FESTIVALS WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a report to tell about a festival that they know using the model report - Standard: Write the report using questions and the the model report - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the report + Vocabulary: report (n); councilor(n); take(v); communal(a). + Structures: Structure of writing a report Past simle tense Passive voice.

(128) “ to take + a number of time” b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using questions and model report - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the report c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know how to save the good traditions of the nation 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ a. Write the new words b. Read the passage aloud c. Tell some information about noel * Answers: a. - christmas tree : cây thông Noel - Christmas card: thiếp mừng noel - christmas carols: những bài thánh ca giáng sinh - Santa Clause: ông già noel - Patron Saint: thánh đỡ đầu b. A student read aloud c. A student tell aloud about before the class * Marks: a. 5 x 2 =10 ms b. Read correctly = 10 ms c. Tell correctly, fluently =10 ms * Warm up - Have ss play Memory game with all picture in page 126 + rice cooking festival + fire- festival.

(129) …… * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- writing. Students’ actions Listen to the teacher’s guide. - T guide: ask ss use the information in the dialogue on page 121 to fill in the gap in this report - Have ss do about 7 minutes - Call some ss give the answers. 1. Exercise 1. - T correct and give the right. 1- rice- cooking 2- one 3- water- fetching 4- run 5- water 6- traditional 7- bamboo 8- six 9- separate 10- added. - Call 1 or 2 ss read aloud after finish - T listen and correct if neccesary 18’. 2. While- writing - T guide ss do: now you base on the passage above, write other passage talk about a festivals which. - Listen to the teacher’s guide.

(130) you joined recently. First you answers to the questions below can help you - Notes, In your passage have to following information + Name: + Place: + Length: thời gian + Activities: hoạtđộng + How: cách chơi + Comments: cảm nhận. 2. Exercise 2 This report shows how the MidAutumn festival was held in my neighborhood.. - Ask ss do about 15 minutes. The Mid- Autumn festival was. - Call some ss read aloud. held on the 15th of August according. - T correct and give outline. to Lunar Calenda. This festival was specially organized for children. It was held in the yard of the cultural house in my village. The main festival lasted for about three hours when thw moon is at its fullest. During the festival children took part in various activities like: singing and shouting, wearing masks, parading on the roads and banging the drums. Besides, the children ate a very special cake called Moon cakes. They are filled with lotus seeds, oranges peel, grounds beans and sometimes egg and pork fat for flavor..

(131) Children went on playing traditional games until mid- night. I think this festival is a very special occasion for Viet Namese people and specially for children to play and enjoy on a variety of a activities. More over, children would understand more about Viet Namese traditions. - Read and listen to the teacher’s check 10. 3. Post writing - Call other ss read their write aloud - T listen and correct their mistakes. - Listen and copy. if necessary c. Feed back 1’ - Some traditional festival in Viet Nam - The content of your passage d. Home work. 1’. - Write a passage talk about a festival which you’ve joined - Prepare part language focus REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period 86. UNIT 13 FESTIVALS.

(132) LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Past simple and present perfect in the passive form - Compound nouns - Reported speech - Standard: Complete the sentences using the words in the box Complete the dialogues using the verbs in the box Complete the sentences using the compound nouns Report the sentences - Higher: Ask and answer some more questions + Vocabulary: jumble(v); pull (v); mushroom(n); bull(n); fight(v); industry(n); export(v); plumber(n); pipe(n). + Structures: Progressive tenses b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: OMIT b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Consolidation: - Ask ss retell the using and structure of passive voice - Ask ss give an example for each. Students’ actions 1. Passive voice - S + is/ am/are + P2 - S + was/ were + P2 - S + will + be + P2.

(133) + eg:. - S + have been + P2. People have built this hotel recently * Notes: This hotel has been built recently. - đặt tân ngữ của câu chủ động xuống làm chủ ngữ của câu bị động. - Ask ss give the way to change. - Đặt V to be đúng với thì của câu chủ động - Đặt V của câu chủ động ở phân từ hai và sau động từ to be - Đặt bổ ngữ của câu chủ động sau P2 - Đặt chủ ngữ của câu chủ động làm tân ngữ của câu bị động trước nó có từ “by” - Nếu chủ ngữ không rõ có thể hiểu ngầm thì có thể bỏ không cần viết vào. - Ask ss to retell the structure of compound noun. 2. Compound noun ( compound words) - Compound noun = noun + V-ing + eg:. - Retell the structure of reported speech. rice Noun. cooking V-ing. 3. Reported speech - S + said + S + V….. 25’. - S + asked + S + V…. 2. Exercises - Ask ss do ex1 “ complete the sentences, use the passive forms of the verbs in the box - Call some ss come to the board and write the answers and explain why? By decide whether the time is past, present ao future - T correct and give keys. 1. Exercise 1 1- were performed 2- was decorated 3- is made 4- will be held.

(134) 5- was written - Ask ss do ex2 “ complete the conversation use the verbs in the box” - T explain some new words - Call some pairs read aloud before the class - T give keys. 2. Exercise 2 * New words. - Ask ss do ex3 “ rewrite the sentences in your exercise book. Use a compound noun in your exercise” - Call some ss come to the board and write the answers - T correct and give keys. - jumble (v) làm lộn xộn - scatte (v) rải rác, bắn tung toé * Answers 1- jumbled 2- broken. - Guide ss find out the meaning of some phrasal words. 3- broken 4- scattered 5- pulled 3. Exercise 3 a. It’s a fire- making contest. - Ask ss do ex4 in page 130 - Call some ss come to the board and write the answers - T correct and give the right. b. It’s a bull- fighting festival c. It’s a car- making industry d. It’s a flowers- arranging contest e. It’s a rice- exporting country f. It’s a clothes- washing machine * Meaning of words a- lấy lửa b- lễ hội chọi trâu c- công nghiệp sản xuất ô tô.

(135) d- thi cắm hoa e- đất nước xuất khẩu gạo f- máy giặt 4. Exercise 4 a- He said he was plumber b- He said he could fix the faucets c- He said the pipes were broken d- He said new pipes were very expensive e- He said I had to pay him then c. Feed back 3’ - The using and structure of + Passive voice + Compound words + Reported speech d. Home work 2’ - Learn by heart the structure and give an example - Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: / /2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: / /2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: / /2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: / /2014. Period 87. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read 1. The aims of the lesson a. Knowledges:.

(136) + The aims of the whole unit : By the end of the unit, ss will be able to: - Ask and answer questions about famous wonders of the world - Write to a friend to tell about a new place + The aims of the lesson + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue among Hoa, Nga and Nhi about the famous place in the USA then complete the summary - Standard: Practice and understand the dialogue to complete the summary - Higher: Ask and answer some questions about the dialogue + Vocabulary: clue(n); Asia(n); bored(a); explain(v); rule(n). + Structures : - Passive forms - Indirect questions with “if” or “whether” - V + to-infinitive - Question words before to- infinitive b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty, the life 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions - Change these sentences into passive voice + People have built this hotel recently + Break the glass into small pieces * Answers: +This hotel has been built recently + The glass is broken into small pieces * Marks:.

(137) - 2 x 5 = 10 ms * Warm up - Have ss play “ recognizing pictures” with some famous places in the world a. The Great Wall of China b. The Learning Tower of Pisa c. The Empire State building d. The Eiffel Tower e. The Golden Gate Bridge f. The Taj Mahal Monument a- 4. c-6. e- 5. b-1. d- 2. f- 3. * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 5’ 1. Getting stated - T introduce: we have played the. Students’ actions - Listen and answer the questions.. game about the world heritages in Viet Nam. Now you have one more chance to know about the heritage in other countries. Each groups has 5- 7 pictures of the heritage in the world. You discuss with your friends and match the name with the correct heritage.. 1. Answers. - Call some ss give the answers. a. The Pyramids. - T correct and give the right. b. Sydney Opera house c. Stonehenge.

(138) 32’. 2. Listen and read - T play the tape 1 time part listen. * Answers. and read page 131. ask ss listen and answer the questions. a. It’s a Guessing Game. ? a. What is the name of the game in the tape. b. Students think of a famous place. ? b. How to play it. or person. - T give the answers and explain if neccesary. - Remember students only ask Yes. - T explain: Teacher or the student. or No question and the word- keeper. who keeps the word gives a clue. only say yes if the answer is right. ( the information that help us to find the answers and then students have to ask teacher or the word- keeper - or “ No” if the answer is wrong. The student who finds the place or the person the most quickly will be the winner 2. Keys - Ask ss practice read the dialogue. 1- games. aloud before the class. 2- place. - T listen and correct their mistakes. 3- clue. - T guide: Now you read the. 4- Viet Nam. conversation again and complete the 5- America summary by filling the blank with. 6- Golden. the most suitable words. 7- right. - Call some ss come to the board. 8- was. and write the answers - T correct and give keys 3. Practice.

(139) S1: It’s in Viet Nam S2: Yes S1: It’s in the North - Have ss play guessing game. S2: Yes. - T give some heritage in Viet Nam. S1: It’s in QN province. and ask ss do. S2: Yes. - Ask ss do about 4 minutes. S1: It is Ha Long Bay. - Call some pairs speak aloud in. S2: You are right. front of the class - T correct and give the right c. Feed-back(1’) Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson? d. Homework (3’) - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart - Write 20 questions for the key: It’s a famous place in Viet Nam - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ Speak” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. / / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period 88. UNIT 14.WONDER OF THE WORLD LESSON 2 : SPEAK 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledges.

(140) + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to make questions about the famous places in the world and then report them to a partner - Standard: Make questions and report them - Higher: Write a passage about the places + Vocabulary: barrier reef(n); southern(a); heritage(n); site(n). + Structures: The reported speech with Yes/ No questions b. Skills: speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions a. Read the dialogue again b. Make a dialogue the same guessing game * Answers: a. 2 students read aloud b. 2 students make and speak aloud before the class * Marks: a. Read correctly = 10 ms b. Do and speak correctly = 10 ms * Warm up - Have ss play “ net work” game about the name of famous places in Viet Nam and the world Eiffel tower Big Ben Ha Long Bay. Mount Everest. Phong Nha cave. * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson:.

(141) Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Pre- speaking. Students’ actions. - Ask ss to look at famous places in the book and tell me the place that. 1. Famous places. you know. - Great Wall of China (n) vạn lý. - T introduce them. trường thành. - Picture. - Empire State building: cao ốc…. - Picture. - Petronas Twin Towers: tháp đôi. - Picture. - Great Barier Reef: vỉ san hô ngầm. - Picture. - Hue citadel : cố đô Huế. - Picture. - Ha Long Bay: Vịnh Hạ Long. - Picture. - Phong Nha Cave: động phong nha. - Picture. - Eiffel Tower: tháp …. - Picture. - Mount Everest: núi…. - Picture. - Big ben: đồng hồ. - Picture - Picture - Ask ss practice write the questions and answer with all places above. 2. Answers the questions. the same example in the book - Ask ss do individually. Questions Is Phong Nha. Yes No ave in Sou ther n in Viet Na m?. Is Petronas Twin. + +.

(142) Tower the tallest building in the world Is the Great Barrier. +. Reef aworld heritage. 18’. 2. While- speaking - Ask ss use all questions in part 1 and some partners in the class then check who answer Yes/ No the right - Call some pairs ask and answers aloud before the class. site Is Great wall of China. +. in ShangHai? Is the Empire State. +. building in USA? Does Big Ben gave. +. GMT? Is Ha Long a world. +. heritage? Is Eiffel Tower in. +. German? Does Hue citadel have. +. Ngo Mon Gate?. - Let ss pay attention the sentences in direct and indirect. 2. Structure: Indirect + eg: - I said to. “ Is Eiffel Tower in. asked Hoa Germany”? - In order to understand more about this grammar point you do exercise 3, report the activities you have done. - I asked Hoa if/ whether Eiffel Tower was in Germany? * Notes: If/ whether: xem la.

(143) - Call some ss talk aloud before the calss - T listen, correct their mistakes 3. Practice S1: I asked Hoa if Phong Nha cave was in Southern Viet Nam. She said that it wasn’t S2: I asked Nga whether Petronas Twin Towers in Malaysia was the highest building in the world. She said that it was 5’. 3. Post- speaking. ……. - Turn the following sentences into the indirect one. 4. Futher practice. a. The teacher said to students “ Do you remember to do your home. a. The teacher asked his students if. work. they remembered to do their. b. The doctor said to the patient “. homework. Do you fell better now”. b. The doctor asked the patient if he. c. The mother said to her son “ Are. felt better then. you hungry”. c. The mother asked her son if he. d. The boy said to the girl “ Can I. was hungry. go with you to school”. d. The boy asked the girl if he could. - call some ss come to the board and go with her to school write the answer - T correct and give keys - Call some ss read the answer aloud before the class - T listen and correct.

(144) c. Feed-back (1’) Ask ss to write about the place they like most(5 sentences) d. Homework(1’) - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart - Write the sentences in the book - Prepare for the next lesson : Part “ Listen ” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period 89. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 3 : Listen. 1. The aim of the lesson a. Knowledges + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen to the advertisement and find out the mistakes and correct them - Standard: Listen and find out the mistakes and correct them - Higher: Answer some questions about the advertisement + Vocabulary: jungle(n); crystal- clear(a); coral(n); snorkel(n); marine(a); coconut palm Inn. + Structures: Present and future simple, modals b. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the advertisement and and find out the mistakes and correct them + Speaking: Ask and answer some questions about the advertisement.

(145) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ a. Write the new words again b. Make a dialogue the same last period * Answers: a. 1 student write - Great Wall of China (n) vạn lý trường thành - Empire State building: cao ốc… - Petronas Twin Towers: tháp đôi - Great Barier Reef: vỉ san hô ngầm - Hue citadel : cố đô Huế - Ha Long Bay: Vịnh Hạ Long - Phong Nha Cave: động phong nha - Eiffel Tower: tháp … b. 2 students make and speak aloud before the class * Marks: a. Write correctly = 10 ms b. Do and speak correctly = 10 ms * Warm up - Have ss play “ net work” game about the name of famous places in Viet Nam and the world Eiffel tower. Big Ben Ha Long Bay.

(146) Mount Everest. Phong Nha cave. * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time 15’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre- listening - T introduce somw new words in the listen + explain + explain. Students’ actions 1. New words - Jungle (n) rừng - Crystal- clear water: nước trong như pha lê - coral sea: biển san hô - snorkel: bơi lặn có sử dụng ống thở. + explain + explain - T read and ask ss read after - T call some ss read again - T listen and correct their mistakes. An advertisement for Great Barrier Reef Marine Par. A world Heritcige Site. - Ask ss read the advertisement and find out the leading idea - Call a student give the leading idea - T listen and write on the board - T guide: you will hear a 2. Answers Do you want a quiet relaxing nsland. You listen to the tape and vacation? - Look no further than beautiful find out then correct the mistakes in farnorth Queensland. Stay right on the advertisement. the beach at the coconut palm hotel conversation about the trip to Quee-.

(147) - T play the tape 2 -3 times part listen page 133 15’. 2. While- listening - Ask ss compare the answes with partner - Call some ss read the answers. . Take guided tours through the rainforest, swim in the crystal clear water of the coral sea and snorkel amongs the coral of the Great Barrier Reef Marrine Park - A world heritage site - Call 007 692 439 27 fore more information. aloud - T play the tape again, stop by stop. - Play game. and help ss check the answers - T give the right 7’. 3. Post- listening - Have ss play Mapped dialogue about the content of listening about 7 minutes - call some ss do - T listen and correct c. Feed back: 2’. T: Calls on a Ss to change the questions and answers below in to the reported speech. 1. “Is Mount Everest in Nepal ?” I asked Linda. She said “Yes, it is” 2. “Is Ha Long Bay in Southern Viet Nam ?”, I asked Li Li. She said “ No, it isn’t” Ss: Do as T says. T(?) What do you think about it ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Ss: Listen and write. Answer key: 1. I asked Linda if Mount Everest was in Nepal. She said that it was. 2. I asked Li Li whether Ha Long Bay was in Southern Viet Nam. She said that it wasn’t. d. Home work 1’ - Review the lesson carefully. - Exercise: 3,4(86,87). - Prepare for the next lesson, Read..

(148) REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period 90.. UNIT 14 : WONDERS OF THE WORLD Lesson 4: READ. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about the seven wonders of the world - Standard: Read and complete the sentences - Higher: Take a note about the 7 wonders + Vocabulary: compile (v); include (v); claim (v); ancient (a); honor(v); religious (a); royal (a); ruler (n) + Structures: - Past simple tense - Passive voice b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to read c. Education: ing skills 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions - Read the advertisement aloud * Answers: - A student read aloud * Marks.

(149) - Read correctly, fluently = 10 ms * Warm up - Have ss play “ guessing game” about some world heritage site + It’s 4500 miles long + It’s the only man- made thing that can be seen from the space + It’s in China - It’s a Great Wall of China * Introduction: In order to broaden their knowledge about them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions Students’ actions 10’ 1. Pre- reading - T guide: In today’s lesson, we will learn more about the world heritages 1. New words - T introduce some world heritage - ancient Greece: Hy lạp cổ + explain đại + explain - compile: biên tập + explain - Hanging Garden of Babylon: vườn treo babylon + explain - Statue of Zeus: tượng thần + explain dớt - know nothing about: chẳng + explain biết gì đến… + explain - Taj Mahal: cung điện… + explain - Angkor Vat: đền… - Buddist religions center: + explain trung tâm phật giáo - Royal capital city: kinh - Read and ask ss repeat after teacher thành - Call some ss read again - T listen and correct their mistakes if neccesary 17’. 2. While- reading - Now you read the passage and do exercise “ matching” about 4 minutes A B 1. Angkor Thom a. made the list of the seven wonders of the world 2.Great Wall of b. used to be the China Royal Capital City of Cambodia. 2. Practice a. Exercise 1 1- b.

(150) 3. Angkor Vat. c. Is one of examples of the wonders which the ancient Greeks knew nothing about. 4. Antipater of d.was build in sidon 1100 - Call some ss give the answers - T correct, give keys and ask ss explain - Now you read the passage again and do ex in the book “ complete the sentences” about 4 minutes - Call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the right. - Call some ss read the passage again and translate it into Viet Namese 10’. 3. Post- reading - Have ss play T/ F repetition drill about the content of text a. The Statue of Zeus was a Greece b. We can’t see the Pyramid of Cheops today - Correct their mistake.. 2- c. 3- d. 4- a. b. Exercise 2 a- C: The only surviving wonder of Antipater’s list is the pyramidof cheops b- A: Angkor Vat was originally built for Hindus c- D: Angkor Vat was part of the Royal Khmer City a long time ago d- B: In the 1400s, the Khmer King choose PhomPhenh as the new capital. 3. Further practice a- F b- T. c. Feed-back (1’) Ask ss: What is the main content of the lesson? d. Homework(2’) - Learn by heart all vocabulary and grammar points. - Do exercises in the workbook.

(151) - Prepare for the next period : Part “Write” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period.91 UNIT 14 WONDERS OF THE WORLD LESSON 5: WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a letter to tell about a trip somewhere using the model letter - Standard: Write the letter using the model letter and the prompts - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter + Vocabulary: although (prep); form(v); quite(adv); level(n); lead(v); hike(n); edge(n); inhabitant(n). + Structures: Structure of a letter Past simle tense “ to lead someone to somewhere” b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using prompts and model letter - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love the beauty 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions.

(152) a. Read the passage aloud b. Write the new words on the board * Answers: a. A student read the new words aloud before the class b. - Ancient Greece: Hy lạp cổ đại - compile: biên tập - Hanging Garden of Babylon: vườn treo babylon - Statue of Zeus: tượng thần dớt - know nothing about: chẳng biết gì đến… * Marks a. Read correctly, fluently = 10 ms b. 5 x 2 = 10ms * Warm up - Have ss play “ net work” game about some world heritage Ha Long Bay. Great Wall of China. Phong Nha cave Twin Towers * Introduction: In order to broaden their knowledge about them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 1. Pre- writing - T guide: Today we will learn how to write a letter to a friend telling him or her about your last trip to a famous places. Firstly, you read Tim’s letter to his friend - T introduce new words + explain + explain + explain + explain + explain - Now, you work in pairs, read the letter again and insert the sentences in the correct blank - I call some ss read aloud the. Students’ actions 1. New words - Canyon: khe núi - park ranger: người giữ cômg viên - guide hike: cuộc đi bộ có hướng dẫn viên - edge(n) rìa, mép - original inhabitants: cư dân gốc ở một nơi nào đó.

(153) 20’. answers - T give the right 2. While- writing - Base on Tim’s letter, you now write a letter to your friend telling him or her about your last trip to a famous places. - Your letter should include + place: địa điểm + distance from your city: khoảng cách + how to get there: phương tiện đi lại + sights: phong cảnh + weather : thời tiết + how you feel: cảm nghĩ của em - Ask ss compare the writer with friends - Call some ss read the letter aloud - T give the keys. 2. Practice a. Exercise 1 C: I hope you are studying hard for your exams next week B: The Grand Canyon is part of Grand Canyon National Park and it was formed by the Colorado River over millions of years D: He also talked about the original inhabitants who lived there during the Stone Age A: That’s all I have time to tell you about b. Exercise 2 How are you ? I was very happy to get your letter 2 weeks ago. I have just finished my exams and I did quite well. My class has just come back from a trip to Phong Nha cave a world Heritage in central Viet Nam. It’s about 500 km from Ha noi and it took us 10 hours to get there by train. We stayed in Dong Hoi city for one night before the wonderful trip to Phong Nha Cave started. The next day, we got up very early and went to Phong Nha Cave. We did lots of things but the one we enjoyed most is the guided tour into the big Cave. Although it’s a summer day. It’a very cold and dark inside. The guide showed us the history of the linestone which made such magnificent caves. We took many photographs with local people there. We came back to the hotel in Dong Hoi in the afternoon. We swam in Nhat Le beach. It was really fantastic. The water is clear and the sand is smooth We felt very happy after the trip. I enclose a photo that I took during the trip. I hope you like..

(154) I am looking forward to hearing from you soon. Your friend, Hoa - Play game. 7’ 3. Post- writing - Have ss play “ insection” game - T give 2 missing words letters, ask Ss practice in groups and insert the missing words - Call some ss give the answers - T correct and give right c. Feed back: 2’. T(?) How is an informal letter organized ? Ss: Answer. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Givers comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work 1’ - Review the lesson. - Write a letter to your friend say about your recent trip. - Prepare for the next lesson. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period. UNIT 14. WONDER OF THE WORLD LESSON 6 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge:.

(155) + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - The passive forms: in the past simple tense - Indirect questions with “if” and “whether” - Question-words before to-infinitives - Verb + to infinitive - Standard: Complete the sentences using the passive forms of the verbs in the box Report the questions Nhi asked Nga Complete the Nhi’s questions using the question-words+ to infinitive Complete the passage using to infinitives or bare-infinitives - Higher: Ask and answer some more questions + Vocabulary: construct(v); present (v); decide(v); shelter(n); complete(a); second(n). + Structures: To-infinitive or bare infinitive Reported questions Passive forms b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship 2. Preparations a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions - Read the letter which you wrote in last period * Answers: - 1 or 2 ss read aloud before the class * Marks - Read correctly, fluently = 10 ms.

(156) * Warm up - Have ss play “ slap the board” with some words in ex1 + construct + design + reach + present + complete * Introduction: In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 15’ 1. Consolidation. - Ask ss to retellthe form and the way to change into passive voice. - Ask ss to retell the way to change form direct into indirect( Đổi Yes/ No questions thành câu hỏi gián tiếp) - Dùng if / whether để nối mệnh đề chính với câu hỏi gián tiếp - T give an example and help ss explain ? Em có nhận xét gì về cấu trúc trong câu. - Ask ss to retell the way to change form direct into indirect ( đổi yes/ no qs thành câu hỏi gián tiếp) dùng if/ whether để nối mệnh đề chính với câu hỏi gián tiếp.. - T give an example and help ss explain ? Em có nhận xét gì về cấu trúc trong câu. Students’ actions 1. Passive voice * Change: - đưa tân ngữ của câu chủ động xuống làm chủ ngữ của câu bị động - Đặt V to be đúng thì của câu chủ động - Đặt V của câu chủ động sau động từ tobe và ở quá khứ phân từ - Đặt bổ ngữ của câu chủ động sau V P2 - Đặt chủ ngữ của câu chủ động sau bổ ngữ trước nó có từ “by” * Structure + S + am/ is/ are + P2 + S + was/ were + P2 + S + will be + P2 + S + have been + P2 2. Indirect question with if/ whether Eg: I asked Hoa “ Is Eiffel Tower in Germany” I asked Hoa if/ whether S1 V-ed S2 Eiffel Tower was in Germany N V O 3. Question words before to infinitive eg:Nga told Nhi how to get there S V O Qs TO- inf.

(157) 4. Verb- to( infinitive) I dicided to come back to my home It started to rain very heavily Nga tried to finish he essay in time. 22’. 2. Exercises - Now you do ex 1” coplete the sentences use the passive form of the verbs in the box” - Call some ss read aloud the sentences after finish - T correct and give keys - Ask ss do Ex 2 - Call some ss write the answer. - Ask ss do ex3 - Call some ss give the answers - T correct and give the keys. - Ask ss do ex4 - Call some ss give the answer - T correct and give the right. 1. Exercise 1 a. Sydney Opera house was completed in 1973 b. …. was constructed c. ……was designed d. … was presented e. …… was reached 2. E xercise 2 a Nhi asked Nga if /whether she knew my son b. Nhi asked Nga if /whether it was far from Ha Noi c. Nhi asked Nga if /whether my son was in Quang Nam province d. . Nhi asked Nga if /whether many people lived at My Son e. Nhi asked Nga if /whether many tourists visited My Son every year f. Nhi asked Nga if /whether she wanted to visit My Son one day 3. Exercise3 b. Nga showed Nhi where to get the tickets c. Nga pointed out where to by souvernirs d. Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to HoiAn e. Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit. 4. Ex 4 0. to go 2. go along 4. to rain 6. to continue. 1. to jog 3. to gather 5. to reach 7. to get.

(158) c. Feed back: 2’ - Review the form + passive voice + indirect + question words before V-inf + V + to inf d. Home work 1’ - Learn by heart the using of form - Complete all ex - Review, prepare for next test REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. PERIOD 93: REVISION FOR THE TEST 1. The aims a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14 + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “recreation” and “ the world around us” + Structures: - Past progressive tense - Connectors: “while” and “when” - Reported questions with “if” or “whether” - Question words followed by an infinitive - Compound words - Verb + to infinitive - Passive forms in the past simple.

(159) b. Skill: all four skills c. Education: can use English correctly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: planning lesson, picture, small board, … b. Students: preparing lesson, materials… 3. The state of the lesson a. Activity 1 : (5) 1. Indirrect question : ? Asks students to retell the form of this grammar then ask students to make some examples with friends. Ex : Lan asked me “ Are you a student ? ” Lan asked me if I was a student Ex : Hung asked Lan “ Do you live in Thuan Chau ? ” Hung asked Lan if she lived in Thuan Chau. Clause + if / whether + S + Ved/ p1 + O. b Activity 2 : (17). 2. Passive form : BE + Ved/p2 ? Ask students to make some examples in readl life then ask them change those sentences into passive. 1. So + am / is / are + Ved / p2 + by + Os 2. So + was / were + Ved / p2 + by + Os 3. So + Vmod + be + Ved / p2 + by + Os 4. So + have / has + been + Ved / p2 + by + Os. 3. Verb pattern : - Take out the forms of all tenses ? Ask them to work in groups to * Wh- question before Verb infinitive: Ex : I asked Lan “ Where do I go to see a do the exercise then let them movie ? ” read all full sentences aloud I asked Lan where to go to see a movie Ex : Lan asked me “ How do we make this cake ? ” Lan asked me how to make this cake - Present and review all new and Clause + Wh-q + to + V old forms of verbs they often meet in English * V + to + V Stop / finish / start / decide / begin / try ...... Ex : I decide to learn English to get a good job.

(160) He finishes his work to go home. - Let them do some examples with those forms and then let them do all exercises. Verb + to + Verb * Verb + Verb : Can / could / should / have to / may ........ Ex : I will miss the bus She has to do all her work now. Verb + Verb Activity 3 :(10) 1 The past progressive tense : ? Ask students to retell how to use the past progressive then make examples with promps given. Ex : She / do exercises / 2pm yesterday . She was doing exercises at 2pm yesterday . Ex : They / play soccer / 4pm last Sunday . They were playing soccer at 4pm last Sunday . S + was / were + Ving + O + adv. Activity 4 : (10). 2 When / While in past progressive : ? Ask students to recall how to use When and While in past progressive ? Ask students to work in groups and then practise speaking their own situation with pictures in exercise 2 . ? Ask students to work in groups to discuss and match the right sentences . c. Feed back: (2) - review the form + passive voice. Ex :. They / fight / I / arrive When I arrived , they were fighting While they were fighting , I arrived. Ex :. She / come / my family / eat When she came , my family was eating While my family was eating , she came. When + S + Ved.p1 , S + was / were + Ving +O While + S + was / were + Ving + O , S + Ved / p1.

(161) + indirect + question words before V-inf + V + to inf d. Homework: (1) - learn by heart the using of form - complete all ex - review, prepare for next test Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period : TEST 45 MINUTES 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 12 to Unit 14 + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “recreation” and “ the world around us” + Structures: - Past progressive tense - Connectors: “while” and “when” - Reported questions with “if” or “whether” - Question words followed by an infinitive - Compound words - Verb + to infinitive - Passive forms in the past simple b. Skills: 3 skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful 2. The matrix: MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng. Cộng.

(162) TNKQ Pronunciati on. TL. TNKQ. TL. cấp độ thấp. cấp độ cao. Choose the word that The underlined part pronoun different. 5 câu = 1,5 đ. ( 5 cau = 1,5 ). =15 % Vocabulary and grammar structure. ( Choose the best answer) 8 câu = 1,5 đ. (Complete the sentences with correct verb form). 15câu = 3,5đ 35 %. 5 câu = 1,5 đ Reading. Read the passage then fill in the space with a word in the box. (Read the passage then answer the questions. 5câu = 2đ = 20%. 4 câu = 1,5 đ. ( 5 cau x2= 1d). Use the cue words below to write a complete postcard 5. Writing. Rewrite the sentences 5 câu = 1,5 đ. 10 câu =3đ 30 %. câu = 1,5 đ Tổng. 13 câu = 3 đ = 30 %. 5 câu = 1,5đ = 15%. 5 cau – 1 d= 10%. 4 câu = 1,5 d = 15 %. 5 câu -= 1,5 đ = 15%. 5 câu = 1,5 đ = 15 %. 47 câu= 10đ =100.

(163) %. WRITTEN TEST 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: …………………………………………. Class: 8A1 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. I. Choose the one word in which the underline part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group: 1,5 ms 1. a. row b. show c. flow d. how 2. a. prevent b. lend c. receive d. describe 3. a. dropped b. landed c. protected d. wasted 4. a. mineral b. sight c. tidal d. light 5. a. flashlight b. can c. collapse d. behave II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each of the following sentences(1,5ms) 1. Would you mind…………………..in the front seat of the taxi? A. to sit B. sitting C. sits D.sat 2. A contest in which people have to fetch water from the river is called a……………..contest. A. water-fetching B.water - fetch C. fetching - water D. fetch - water 3. The Pyramid of Cheops is one of the seven………………….of the world. A. temples B.pogoda C. churches D. wonders 4. When the phone rang , I ........................... A. sleep B. sleeping C. was sleeping D. slept 5. I asked him ....................... he liked coffee . A. what B. which C. when D. whether 6. I don’t know how..……………. the game. A. play B. to play C. playing D. played 7. The boy................next to Hoa is a new comer. A. sit B. to sit C. sitting D. sits 8. Thanks………………….inviting me to the festival. A.for B. in C. of D. at III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses (1,5ms) 1. I ( watch)……………………….TV when the phone rang. 2. I tried ( solve)…………………….......the problem but I couldn’t. 3. She asked me if I( want )………………………….to have a drink. 4. We (learn )......................…………….... English for 3 years..

(164) 5. Bao is always ( forget)………………..his homework. IV. Read the text then complete the passage:(1ms) in play was game it clue Hoa and Nga were bored , so Nga suggested playing a (1)...................called 20 Questions. Nga explained the rules and then the girls started to (2).................. Nga thought of a place and she gave Nhi a (3).................by saying that it wasn’t (4)................VietNam . Nhi found out the place (5)..............in America and she said(6) …….......was the Statue of Liberty . V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (1,5ms) THE GREAT WALL OF CHINA In China, there is a wall that is 1,500 miles long. It is called the Great Wall of China. It winds uphill and down, through valleys and mountains. It was made by hand. The Great Wall of China was built from 246 - 209 BC. The people of China made it to keep out their enemies. There are watch towers all along the way. The Wall is made of brick and earth. It is high and wide on top. People can walk along the top as if it were a road. No other defense line has ever been made as long as the Great Wall of China. 1. Where is the Great Wall? …………………………………………………………………… 2. When was it built? …………………………………………………………………… 3. What is it made of? …………………………………………………………………… 4. What was it built for? …………………………………………………………………… VI. Rewrite the sentences with cue words given(1,5ms) 1. He said “I am a teacher”. =>He said…………………………………………………………………………… 2. “Do you like to visit Da Lat?”Nhi asked Nga . =>Nhi asked Nga ………………………………………………………………….. 3. Ba bought this book last year. => This book ……………………………………………………………………….. 4. It’s a contest in which people have to cook rice. =>It’s a……………………………………………………………………………… 5. “Where do you live?”, Lan asked Nam => Lan asked Nam ………………………………………………………………….. VII. Use the cue words below to write a complete postcard .(1.5ms) Dear Hoa, I / having / a wonderful time / Da Lat. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The weather / cold / windy. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The people/ this city / friendly and helpful. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

(165) Yesterday I / visit / friend, Lan and her family. It / happy / see them. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Tomorrow I / go to the market to buy /souvenirs for you and my family members. ……………………………………………………………………………………… See you soon. Love, Huong. WRITTEN TEST 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: …………………………………………. Class: 8A4 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. I. Choose the one word in which the underline part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group: 1,5 ms 1.A .open 2.A.recycle 3. A. favor 4. A . proud. B. blow B. sky B. glad B.pronoun. C. canoe C. why C. bank C. enough. D.cold D. country D. happy D. around. 5. a. flashlight b. can c. collapse d. behave II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each of the following sentences(1,5ms) 1./ It’s easy ………. the exercise 2 . a.understands b. to understand c. understanding d.understood . 2./ Would you mind if I………down? . a.sit b. sitting c. sat d. to sit . 3./ People use first-aid………… ease the victim’s pain and anxiety . a. so to as b. in order to c.so as to d. b and c are ok. 4./ The Le family was sleeping ………….. the mailman came. a. when b.while c. for d.to. 5./ .Mount Rushmore……………….. from more than 100 kilometers away. a. see b. saw c. can be seen d.seeing. 6./ It is a contest in which participants have to cook rice. It’s a …………….. contest. a. cook - rice b. water-fetching c. rice-cook d. rice- cooking. 7./ Nhi decided………………..for a walk . a. go b. to go c. going d.goes. 8./ Every milk bottle can be ……………….thirty times . a. reused b.to reuse c. reduced d. reducing .. III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses (1,5ms) 1. Sydney Opera House…………………..(complete) in 1973 . 2. They ………………………….. (watch) a football match at 9 o’clock last night ..

(166) 3. Lan……………………………..(live) in Ha Noi since 2005. 4.While Hoa was eating, the phone………………..(ring) .. 5. Bao is always ( forget)………………..his homework. IV. Fill in the blanks:(1 point): The Taj Mahal The Sydney Opera House. Cambodia Egypt. Quang Nam. The Hanging Garden.. 1./_____________________________is in India. 2./ The Pyramid of Cheops is in _______________. 3./ ______________________of Babylon was in Iraq. 4./ ______________________ is in Australia.. V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (1,5ms) There is no water or air on the moon. Because there is no air, the moon is silent. At night it is very cold. On the moon we will be able to jump very high and maybe we won’t sleep very well because one day on the moon lasts for two weeks. 1. Is there any water on the moon? -> ……………………………………………. 2. Why is the moon silent? -> …………………………………………………….. 3. What’s the weather like on the moon at night? -> …………………………………………………………………………………. 4. Will we be able to jump very high on the moon? -> ………………………………........................................................................ 5. Four weeks on the earth is how many days on the moon? ->…………………………………………………………………………………. VI. Rewrite the sentences with cue words given(1,5ms) 1. He said: “I am a teacher”. =>He said…………………………………………………………………………… 2. “Do you like to visit Da Lat?”Nhi asked Nga . =>Nhi asked Nga ………………………………………………………………….. 3. Ba bought this book last year. => This book …………………………………………………………………….. 4. It’s a contest in which people have to make fire. =>It’s a……………………………………………………………………………… 5. “Where do you live?”, Lan asked me => Lan asked me ……………………………………………………………….. VII. Use the cue words below to write a complete postcard .(1.5ms) Dear Hoa, I / having / a wonderful time / Da Lat. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The weather / cold / windy. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The people/ this city / friendly and helpful. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Yesterday I / visit / friend, Lan and her family. It / happy / see them..

(167) ……………………………………………………………………………………… Tomorrow I / go to the market to buy /souvenirs for you and my family members. ……………………………………………………………………………………… See you soon. Love, Huong. WRITTEN TEST 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: …………………………………………. Class: 8A3 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. I. Choose the one word in which the underline part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group: 1,5 ms 1. a. row b. show c. flow d. how 2. a. prevent b. lend c. receive d. describe 3. a. dropped b. landed c. protected d. wasted 4. a. mineral b. sight c. tidal d. light 5. a. flashlight b. can c. collapse d. behave II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each of the following sentences(1,5ms) 1. My house was……. yesterday A. paint B. painting C. to paint D. painted 2. The boy………...the bicycle is Nam A. repaired B. repairing C. repair D. to repair 3. We study hard…..…next exam A.in order to pass B. in order pass C so as pass D.so not as to pass 4. Would you mind……..the door? A.close B closes. C. closing D closed 5. I…..the floor when the phone rang A. is cleaning B. clean C. cleaned D. was cleaning 6. Nga told Nhi how…….there A.go B. going C. to go D. went 7. Viet Nam is a rice-……. country A. export B. exporting C exported. D. exports 8. Thanks………………….inviting me to the festival. A.for B. in C. of D. at III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses (1,5ms) 1. I ( play) badminton………………………. when it rained 2. Hung………… always…………( go ) to school late..

(168) 3. She asked me if I( be)………………………….a teacher. 4. He …………………… ( not eat ) dinner yet. 5. They will………………( visit) their parents next week.. IV. / Choose the word or phrase that best fits the blank space in the following passage. (1 ms) Hoa, Nga and her cousin Nhi were (1) ________________, so Nga suggested that they play a game called 20 questions. She (2) ________________ the rules and then the girls started to play. Nga thought of a place and she gave the others a (3) ________________ by saying that it wasn’t in Viet Nam. Nhi found (4) ________________ the place was in America. Hoa thought it was the Golden Gate Bridge, but that is in San Francisco. Nhi was (5) ________________ when she said it was the Statue of Liberty. 1/ A. careful B. hard C. bored D. boring 2/ A. told B. explained C. spoke D. said 3/ A. clue B. answer C. result D. key 4/ A. in B. on C. out D. of 5/ A. right B. wrong C. sad D. incorrect. V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (1,5ms) The festival was held in the communal house yard about one kilometer away from the river. There were three competitions: water-fetching, fire-making and rice-cooking. In the water-fetching contest, one person from each team had to run to the river to get the water. In the fire-making contest, two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way. Six people from each team took part in the rice-cooking contest. They had to separate the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. 1) Where was the rice-cooking festival held?  .......................................................................................................................................... 2) How many competitions were there in the festival? ............................................................................................................................................ 3) How was the fire made?  ........................................................................................................................................... 4) How many people from each team took part in the rice- cooking contest? ............................................................................................................................................. VI. Rewrite the sentences with cue words given(1,5ms) 1. He said “I live in Son La”. =>He said………………………………………………………………………… 2. “Do you play sports?” Nhi asked Nga . =>Nhi asked Nga ……………………………………………………………….. 3. Ba bought this book last year. => This book …………………………………………………………………….. 4. It’s a contest in which people have to cook rice. =>It’s a…………………………………………………………………………… 5. “What are you doing?”, Lan asked Nam => Lan asked Nam ……………………………………………………………….. VII. Use the cue words below to write a complete postcard .(1.5ms) Dear Hoa, I / having / a wonderful time / Da Lat. ……………………………………………………………………………………….

(169) The weather / cold / windy. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The people/ this city / friendly and helpful. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Yesterday I / visit / friend, Lan and her family. It / happy / see them. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Tomorrow I / go to the market to buy /souvenirs for you and my family members. …………………………………………………………………………………… See you soon. Love, Huong. WRITTEN TEST 45 MINUTES SUBJECT: ENGLISH Name: …………………………………………. Class: 8A2 Mark. The teacher’s remarks. I. Choose the one word in which the underline part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group: 1,5 ms 1. a. row b. show c. flow d. how 2. a. prevent b. lend c. receive d. describe 3. a. dropped b. landed c. protected d. wasted 4. a. mineral b. sight c. tidal d. light 5. a. flashlight b. can c. collapse d. behave II. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each of the following sentences(1,5ms) 1. Would you mind…………………..in the front seat of the taxi? A. to sit B. sitting C. sits D.sat 2. A contest in which people have to fetch water from the river is called a……………..contest. A. water-fetching B.water - fetch C. fetching - water D. fetch - water 3. The Pyramid of Cheops is one of the seven………………….of the world. A. temples B.pogoda C. churches D. wonders 4. When the phone rang , I ........................... A. sleep B. sleeping C. was sleeping D. slept 5. I asked him ....................... he liked coffee . A. what B. which C. when D. whether 6. I don’t know how..……………. the game. A. play B. to play C. playing D. played.

(170) 7. The boy................next to Hoa is a new comer. A. sit B. to sit C. sitting D. sits 8. Thanks………………….inviting me to the festival. A.for B. in C. of D. at III. Supply the correct form of the verbs in parentheses (1,5ms) 1. I ( play) badminton………………………. when it rained 2. Hung………… always…………( go ) to school late. 3. She asked me if I( be)………………………….a teacher. 4. He …………………… ( not eat ) dinner yet. 5. They will………………( visit) their parents next week.. IV. / Choose the word or phrase that best fits the blank space in the following passage. (1 ms) Hoa, Nga and her cousin Nhi were (1) ________________, so Nga suggested that they play a game called 20 questions. She (2) ________________ the rules and then the girls started to play. Nga thought of a place and she gave the others a (3) ________________ by saying that it wasn’t in Viet Nam. Nhi found (4) ________________ the place was in America. Hoa thought it was the Golden Gate Bridge, but that is in San Francisco. Nhi was (5) ________________ when she said it was the Statue of Liberty. 1/ A. careful B. hard C. bored D. boring 2/ A. told B. explained C. spoke D. said 3/ A. clue B. answer C. result D. key 4/ A. in B. on C. out D. of 5/ A. right B. wrong C. sad D. incorrect. V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (1,5ms) The festival was held in the communal house yard about one kilometer away from the river. There were three competitions: water-fetching, fire-making and rice-cooking. In the water-fetching contest, one person from each team had to run to the river to get the water. In the fire-making contest, two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way. Six people from each team took part in the rice-cooking contest. They had to separate the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. 1) Where was the rice-cooking festival held?  .......................................................................................................................................... 2) How many competitions were there in the festival? ............................................................................................................................................ 3) How was the fire made?  ........................................................................................................................................... 4) How many people from each team took part in the rice- cooking contest? ............................................................................................................................................. VI. Rewrite the sentences with cue words given(1,5ms) 1. He said “I live in Son La”. =>He said………………………………………………………………………… 2. “Do you play sports?” Nhi asked Nga . =>Nhi asked Nga ……………………………………………………………….. 3. Ba bought this book last year. => This book …………………………………………………………………….. 4. It’s a contest in which people have to cook rice..

(171) =>It’s a…………………………………………………………………………… 5. “What are you doing?”, Lan asked Nam => Lan asked Nam ……………………………………………………………….. VII. Use the cue words below to write a complete postcard .(1.5ms) Dear Hoa, I / having / a wonderful time / Da Lat. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The weather / cold / windy. ……………………………………………………………………………………… The people/ this city / friendly and helpful. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Yesterday I / visit / friend, Lan and her family. It / happy / see them. ……………………………………………………………………………………… Tomorrow I / go to the market to buy /souvenirs for you and my family members. …………………………………………………………………………………… See you soon. Love, Huong. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period 95. UNIT 15 COMPUTERS GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims of the lesson: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue and check the sentences - Standard: Practice the dialogue and check the sentences - Higher: Ask and answer questions about the dialogue - Vocabulary: plug(n; v); socket(n); guarantee (n;v); manual(n) .. - Structures : - Present perfect and past simple - Present perfect with “already” and “yet” b. Skills:. - Give and respond to the opinions - Listening-comprehension about papermaking. - Read and understand about a university without a library.

(172) - Write a guide of using a printer using the pictures and the given words c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and know the advantages of computer and keep away from its disadvantages. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time 8’. 25’. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. *Presentation I. Getting started. - Introduce about the computers and ask sts to give the conveniences of the computers. - May speak in vietnamese. - Write in English on the board. ? Who can speak aloud ? - Correct the mistakes and pronunciation. * Conveniences. - Ask sts to copy. - Computers can: + save time + help sts learn interestingly and quickly + be covenient/easy for keeping/storing information. + be very quick in giving answers to our qs. *Practice. - Give words and explain. - Ask sts to give the meanings. - Write words on the board. II. Listen and read 1. Newwords - printer(n) - to connect (v) ket nối - plug (n) phich cắm điẹn - guarantee (n) bảo hành - properly (adv) rieng biẹt..

(173) - Read aloud and ask sts to read after. ? Who can repeat ? ( about 3 - 4 sts ) - Correct the pronunciation. - Repeat the use of the present perfect with yet and already and compare the present perfect and past simple. -Take examples and explain how to use .. 6’. - Introduce the text . - Read aloud the dialogue and ask sts to look at the book. - Let sts read the dialogue in pairs. ? Who can read aloud the dialogue by role play? - Correct the pronunciation. *Production. - Explain the fact and opinion. - Let sts read sentences from a) to f) and ask them to check the boxes ? Who can check on the board? - Correct the mistakes and ask them to copy.. 2.Grammar a) Present perfect with yet and already. Eg: - Have you finished your homework , yet? - No.I haven’t finished my homework, yet. - Yes.I have already done it. b) Comparison of present perfect and past simple. Eg: - I played volleyball yet. - She has gone out.. 3. Practice - Look at the book and ;listen to the teacher. - Read in pairs - ( about 2-3 couples ) 4. Fact or opinion? Check (v) the boxes. - (about 5 sts ) * Answers. a-F d-O b-O e-F c-O f-F. c. Feed-back(1’) What is the main content of the lesson? d. Homework (3’) - Learn the vocabulary and grammar points by heart.

(174) - Write a short passage about computers - Do exercises in the workbook - Prepare for the next lesson “ Speak ” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period 96. UNIT 15 COMPUTERS SPEAK 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Give and respond to the opinions - Listen to a text about how to make paper and fill in the gaps with the words and rearrange the sentences - Standard: Give and respond to the opinions Listen to a text about how to make paper and and rearrange the sentences - Higher: fill in the gaps with the words + Vocabulary: challenging(a); tim-consuming(a); process(n). procedure(n); pulp vat(n); drain(v); fiber(n); smoothe(v); convey(v). + Structures: I like/ dislike… I agree/ disagree… On the other hand, ….

(175) b. Skills: + Speaking: Give and respond to the opinions c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love their country, native land 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Question: ? Who can read aloud the text ? - Correct the pronunciation. * Answer: - A student read aloud before the class. * Mark: - Read correctly and fluently = 10 * Warm up. - Give a picture and ask qs : ? What is it? ? Do you have a computer? ? Have ever used the computer? - Today we will study about the conveniences of the computers b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10 *Pre-speaking. Students’ actions. - Explain words and ask them to give the meanings. - Write words on the board. - explain. 1. Vocabs.. - explain. - unnecessary(a). - explain. - time-consuming : mat t/g. - explain. - challenge: mang tinh thu thach. - explain. - adjust(v) dieu chinh. - Read aloud and ask them to read. - knob(n) num,nut dieu khien..

(176) after. ? Who can repeat these words ? - Correct the pronunciation. 15’. ( about 4-5 sts ). * While-speaking. - Explain the requirement . - Guide sts how to use: I think .......I (don’t) like...........and how to speak: a)Agree or disagree agree or disagree. - Read examples and let sts practise in pairs. - Call some sts to work in pairs before class. - Correct the mistakes and pronunciation.. 10. * Post-speaking.. Eg:. - Let sts read the dialogue in pairs.. - I think computers are useful,so do. - Introduce the situation of the. I.. dialogue.. - I disagree,I think they are. - Ask them to read in silence.. unnecessary.. ? Who can read aloud in pairs? - Correct the pronunciation. b)Read the dialogue. - (about 4-6 sts ) c. Feed-back (1’) What is the main content of the lesson? d. Homework(2’) - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart.

(177) - Make dialogues about part “Speak” - Prepare for the next lesson “ LISTEN ” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period.97 UNIT 16: INVENTIONS LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson sts will know how to speak about inventions. * Language structures - passive voice. * Vocabs: - facsimile,sewing machine,reinforced concrete,microphone,X-ray, loudspeaker,helicopter,optical fiber,laser. b.Skills: Speak and Listen c. Education: Help ss know some inventions in the world. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions: a. Who can read aloud the words of previous lesson? b. Who can read the dialogue. * Answers: a. A student read aloud before the class. b. Two student read aloud before the class. * Mark: a. Read corectly and fluently = 10m.

(178) b. Read correctly and fluently = 10m * Warm up: - In order to speak about inventions ,we will study the lesson today. b. The new lesson: Time 10. Teacher’s actions *Pre-listening. - Explain words and ask sts to give the meanings. - Write words on the board. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - Read aloud and ask sts to read after. ? Who can repeat? - Correct the pronunciation. -Take example and explain the use of passive voice.. Students’ actions - Listen to the teacher. 1. New words. - paper making: - process (n) - procedure (n) - vat(n) thung ,be - drain (v) lam kho - roll (n) cuon - to pour out (v) do ra - smooth (a) phang , nhan - convey(v) chuyen tro, mang di. ( about 3 - 4 sts ). 2.Grammar. Eg: -The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843.. 15 * While –listening. - Introduce the situation of listening. - Let sts read these sentences from a) to d). - Read aloud the tapescript and ask sts to fill in the gaps. ? Who can write the answers on the board?. 3.Practise listening. a) Listen and fill in the gaps ( about 4-5 sts ) *Answers. 1- simple 2- same 3- two hundred 4- left.

(179) 5- roller - Correct the mistakes and ask themto copy. - Let sts read all sentences from a) to g). - Ask sts to guess and put into the correct order ?Who can put? - Repeat the tapescript again. - Ask sts to put the sentences into the correct order - Call a st to write the answers on the board. ? Who can?. b)Listen and put sentences into the correct order. ( about 2 sts ). ( about 1 st ) * Answers. c) paper pulp was placed in the vat. d) paper pulp was mixed with water. a) The water was drained. e) The pulp fibers were poured out. g) The pulp was conveyed under the rollers. f) The fibers were smoothed and pressed dry. b) The paper was put on a. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy. - Some ss read aloud. 10. *Post-listening. - Call a st to read aloud all the order sentences. - Correct the pronunciation. c. Feedback. 3’ - Repeat all the content of the lesson. - Repeat all the content of the lesson. d. Homework 2’ - Learn by heart all the words. - Revise the passive - Do ex 3,4 in the workbook. - Prepare the next lesson REMARKS:. Time: ...................................................................................................................

(180) Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period.98 UNIT 15 COMPUTERS READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about a university without a library - Standard: Read and check the boxes (exercise 1) - Higher: Answer some questions (exercise 2) + Vocabulary: message (n); store (v); access (n); freshman (n); restrict (v); bulletin (n); degree (n); skeptical(a); concern(v) + Structures: Present simple b. Skills : Reading-comprehension: Read and answer the questions (exercise 2) and check the sentences (exercise 1) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson:omit b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions * Pre-reading. - Explain words and ask sts to give. Students’ actions.

(181) the meanings. - Write words on the board. - explain - explain - explain - explain - explain - explain - explain - Read aloud and ask them to read after. ? Who can repeat? - Correct the pronunciation. - Repeat the use of the present perfect tense with yet and already. - Take examples.. - Repeat the use of the modal can and take example. 17’. * While-reading. - Make qs: ? Where in the library do we get store information? ? If we want to discuss student,how can we do? - Introduce the content of the text . - Read once aloud and ask them to look at the book. - Ask sts to read the text in silence. - Call sts to read aloud the text. ? Who can read aloud ? - Correct the pronunciation. - Let sts read sentences from a) to f). - Ask them to read the text again find the information to check. ? Who can give the answers?. 1. New words. - without (prep) - freshman(n) SV nam dau - campus(n) ki tuc xa - restrict(v) han che, gioi han - bulletin board (n) bang tin - skeptical(a) hoai nghi ve - impact (n) a/h,tac dong. ( about 3 - 4sts ). 2. Grammar * Present perfect tense. Eg: - Have you done your homework,yet? - Yes. I have already done my homework. - No. I have not done my homework ,yet. * Modal. Eg: - Students can get degree.. - Listen and try to answer: - Student answer. 3. Practise reading.. - ( about 3 - 4 sts ).

(182) ( about 5 sts ). 15’. * True or False? Check (v) the boxes. * Answers. a- T b- T c- T - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to d- F copy. e- T f- T * Post-reading. - Let sts read all the qs and find the information in the text. - Ask them to answers the qs from 4. Answers the qs. a) to f ). ? Who can write the answers on the board? ( about 4,5 sts ) *Answers. a)It has no library.All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the university’s computers. b)All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a bulletin board.. c)A computer and a telephone line . d)With a bulletin board on the internet,a great number of - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to people(over 20 million) can get copy. access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly. e) ( students’ answers ) c. Feed back. 2’ - Repeat all the content of the text. d. Homework 1’ - Learn all the words. - Practisereading again. - Do ex 5,6 in the workbook..

(183) - Prepare the next lesson. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period. 99 UNIT 15 COMPUTERS. WRITE 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write an instruction on how to use a printer using the pictures and the given words - Standard: write the instruction using the pictures and the given words - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the instruction + Vocabulary: flash (v); screen(n); power(n); removev); load(v); input tray (n); click(v) + Structures: Format of an instruction b. Skills : - Writing skills: guided writing skills using a model instruction - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the instruction c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and self- learn 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’.

(184) * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time 8’. 23’. Teacher’s actions * Pre-writing. - Explain words and ask sts to give the meanings. - Write words on the board and ask them to copy. - example - example - example - example - example - example - example - example - Read aloud and ask them to read after. ? Who can repeat? - Correct the pronunciation. * While-writing. - Ask sts to look at the pictures and match the words with the numbers in the pictures. - Let sts discuss in groups and call one of each group to write the answers on the board. G1 G2 G3 .......................................... - Correct the mistakes and ask them to copy. - Let sts read the requirement and all the words given in the textbook. - Guide sts how to write basing on the example in the textbook.. Students’ actions. 1. Newwords - tray (n)khay - input: - output: - screen(n)man hinh - icon(n) bieu tuong - power button(n)nut dien - click(v)nhan - flash (v) sang len (about 3-4 sts ). 2. Match the words with the numbers in the pictures.. * Answers a) - 3: paper input tray. b) - 1: monitor screen. c) - 6: power button. d) - 2: icon. e) - 4: output path. f) - 5: paper 3.Write the instructions on how to use the printer..

(185) - Let sts write in a few mins. - Call about 4,5 sts to write the answers on the board. ? Who can ?. - (about 4 sts ) * Answers. - Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray. - Wait for the power button to flash. - Have the pages appear on the computer screen. - Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds. - The printed paper will come out of the output path in a minute.. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy. - Read aloud before the class. 6’. * Post-writing. - Call a st to read aloud the fullsentences. - Correct the pronunciation. c. Feed back. 2’ - Repeat the main idea of the lesson. d. Homework. 1’ - Learn all the words. - Do ex 7 in the workbook. - Prepare the next lesson. REMARKS:. Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period. UNIT 15 COMPUTERS LANGUAGE FOCUS.

(186) 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Present perfect with “yet” and “already” - Comparison of present perfect with past simple - Standard: Complete the dialogue using the present perfect with “yet” and “already”. Ask and answer the questions. about the flights using “yet” and “already” Complete the table by recognize the tenses and then complete the dialogues - Higher: Do some more exercises + Vocabulary: through(prep); unplug(v); recently(adv) + Structures: - Present perfect with past simple b. Skills : Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard be friendly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time 15’. Teacher’s actions 1. Grammar structure. - Repeat the use of the present perfect with yet and already . - Take examples and explain.. Students’ actions. 1. Grammar. * Present perfect with yet and already. Eg: - Have you done your homework,yet.

(187) ? - No. I have not done my homework , yet. - Take examples of present perfect - Yes. I have already done my and past simple then explain how to homework. use. * Past simple and present perfect. Eg: - She bought a new car last week. - I have bought a new hat . 20’. 2. Exercise: - Repeat the present perfect with yet and already. - Introduce the requirement of 2. Practice. exercise. * Exercise 1 . - Let sts read Ba’s diary And complete the dialogue. - Call a st to write the answers on the board . ? Who can write the answers on the board? *Answers. (about 4 sts ) - I have finished it already. - I haven’t cleaned and tidied it yet. - I have ( already) turned it off already. - I have already called and told her to have lunch with us. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy. - Introduce the requirement and 2. Exercise 2 . guide them how to use present perfect with yet and already. - Ask them to ask and answer about the flights. - Call some couples to ask and answer. - Correct the mistakes and pronunciation. - Introduce the requirement . - Let sts read the sentences from a) to g) and check the correct column. - Call a st or 2 sts to give the. 3. Exercise 3 . * Answers. Finished action. incomplete action.

(188) answers.. cdefg-. V V V V. 4. Exercise 4 . - Correct the mistakes and ask them to copy. - Repeat the differences between the present perfect and past simple - Ask sts to read the dialogue and the verbs given. - Call some sts to write the answers on the board. ? Who can ?. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy . c. Feed-back (2’) What is the main content of the lesson? d. Homework(2’) - Do the exercises again in the book - Review all vocabulary and grammar - Prerpare for the next period revision REMARKS:. (about 4-5 sts ) *Answers. 1- Have----seen did-----see saw 2- haven’t had. 3- have been 4- Have ----heard. 5- happened 6- had 7- fell 8- broke 9- Has----arrived has did----arrive arrived.. V.

(189) Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: / / 2014 Date of teaching: 8A1: /5//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /5/2014. Period 101: TEST CORRECTION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have their tests checked and correct the tests by themselves + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “recreation” and “ the world around us” + Structures: - Past progressive tense - Connectors: “while” and “when” - Reported questions with “if” or “whether” - Question words followed by an infinitive - Compound words - Verb + to infinitive - Passive forms in the past simple b. Skills: 3 skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: I. Comments (5’) T: Gives comments on students’ tests and turns out the papers to them. Ss: Listen and look through the papers..

(190) T: Asks Ss if they have any more ideas. Ss: Answer. II. Discussion (5’) T: Divides class into groups to discuss the answers with each other in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. III. Correction (30’) T: Calls on some Ss to write the answers on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) What do you think about it ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Shows Ss the answer key of the test. Ss: Look and write it in their notebooks if necessary. c. Feed back: 2’ T: Summarizes the main languages mentioned/available in the test orally once again and encourages Ss to try harder. d. Home work: 2’ Review grammar structures in the test and try to do the test again REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /5//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /5/2014.

(191) Period. UNIT 102: REVISION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: OMIT b. The new lesson: Time 40’. Teacher’s actions I. English tenses. Students’ actions I. English tenses : 1. The simple present tense :. * Adverbs : always, usually, often, sometimes, never, every..., ..... ? Ask students to retell the use , the * Forms : forms of this tense (+) S + V(s/es) + O Ex : She goes to school ? Ask them to make example (- ) S + don’t / doesn’t + V + O Ex: She doesn’t go to school ( ?) Do / Does + S + V + O ? Yes / No Ex : Does she go to school ? Yes , she does 2 The simple past tense :. - Review the simple present tense. * Advs : yesterday , ago , last , when I was…, In the past … ( + ) S + V ed/ p1 + O Ex : Lan went to school on foot ( _ ) S + didn’t + V + O Ex : Lan didn’t go to school on foot ( ? ) Did + S + V + O ?.

(192) for sts ? Ask them to make some examples with this tense. Ex : Did Lan go to school on foot ? 3. The simple future tense : * Adv : tomorow, next( day, month, ....) ( + ) S + will + V +O Ex: Lan will read all those books ( - ) S + won’t + V + O Ex : Lan won’t read all thoae books . ( ? ) Will + S + V + O ? Ex : Will Lan read all thsoe books ? 4. Intension : Be going to. ? Ask student to recall to tell out the using of adverbs Make examples. ? Give out the forms of the verbs and make examples for them. ( + ) S + be going to + V + O Ex : They are going to visit me ( _ ) S + be not going to + V + O Ex : They are not going to visit me ( ? ) Be + S + going to + V + O ? Ex : Are they going to visit you ? 5. The present perfect tense * Adverbs : Since, for, already, recently, just, yet,.... (+) S+ have/ has+ ved/pII+ o Ex: She has done her work (- ) S+ have/ has+not+ved/pII+o Ex : She hasnot done her work (?) Have/ has+ s+ ved/pII+o? Ex : Has she done her work?. c. Feed back: 4’ ask ss to draw a mind map about the tense d. Home work 1’ Learn by heart grammar structures. Do again exercises and review vocabulary..

(193) REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /5//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /5/2014. Period. 103 REVISION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “personal information” + Structures : - Future simple tense to talk about near future and make requests, offers and promises - “ in order to / so as to” - Passive forms in commands and future simple - Adjectives followed by an infinitive or a noun clause - “mind” to make requests - “ed” and “ing” participles b. Skills: 4 skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful 2. Preparations a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, exercises b. Students: review all the grammar points and vocabulary 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary.

(194) 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ draw a mind map about grammar structures review in the last period b. The new lesson: Time 34’. Teacher’s actions ? Ask students to look at those words in part Warm-up ? Ask them to make examples for each word _ Present to students how to change sentences from direct form into indirect form ? Guide them how to change in each kind of verb. Students’ actions I. English forms : . Reported speech : * Verb-Modal : 1 will - would 4 may might 2 shall - should 5 must - must 3 can - could Ex : I said “ I will do my exercises ” I said I would do my exercises Ex : Lan said “ I can speak English well ” Lan said she could speak English well. ? Make some examples for each cases and guide them how to change correctly * Verb – Tobe : Am / Is - Was ? Give an exercise in the card board Are - Were and let studnets to work in pairs to Ex : They said “ We are students ” practise to change them They said they were students Ex : Hoa said “ I am not good at English ” 1 Students said “ We are 12 ” Hoa said she was not good at 2 She said “ I can help Lan ” 3 I said “ I will pass in the exam ” English 4 We said We don’t have money 5 Mr Kien said “ I buy a new car” * Verb – Todo : V( es/s) - Ved/p1 Don’t / Doesn’t - Didn’t + V Ex : We said “ We finish our work ? Ask students to make examples on time ” We said we finished our work by themselves with the real life on time Ex : Ba said “ I don’t understand it ” - Guide them how to change Ba said he didn’t understand carefully it.

(195) ? Ask them to change these sentences into passive - Take its form out - Prepare a card board with those sentences and then let them change sentences into passive ? Ask students practise changing sentences on the board in part Warm – up into passive. 2. Passive form : Ex : I recycle my old clothes My old clothes are recycled by me Ex : She speaks English very well English is spoken very well by her. Ex : Ex : away. ? Ask students to retell how to change sentences into passive.. All clothes will be thrown by them. - Present another form of the passive to students ? Ask them to change sentences given then let them take its form out. - Present special form of passive: Causative form. - Pay attension to be careful of this form - Guide them how to change carefully then let them do some examples - Take its form out. ? Ask students to connect two sentences into V-ing participle form - Explain to students how to do that and make them clear how to change sentences. ? Ask students to work in pairs to practise speaking with those pictures and promps in pictures at page 108.. S + am / is / are + Ved/ p1 + by + O I can re use my pen My pen can be reused by me They will throw all clothes. * 1 2 3 4. S + Vmod + be + Ved/p1 + by + O Exercise 1 : I break your tea cup They can recycle all plastic She will throw her hat Nam reuses all his clothes. 3. The passive form of the simple past tense : Ex : I watched TV yesterday . TV was watched yesterday by me . Ex : She wrote a lot of E words on my book. A lot of E words were written on my book. S + was / were + Ved / p2 + O 4.. Causative form :. Ex : I have Ba wash my hair everyday. I have my hair washed everyday by Ba..

(196) - Present to students other form of participle then ask them to practise. Ex : She has me do her exercises often She has her exercises done often by me. Ex : They had a friend give a postcard They had a postcard given by a friend. Ex : We’ll have Lan book a room for our holiday. We’ll have a room booked for our holiday by Have smb do smt Have smt done by smb 5. Participle forms : a. V-ing form : Ex : This boy is reading under the tree. He is Ba. This boy who is reading under the tree is Ba. This boy reading under the tree is Ba. Ex : My teacher’s walking there.She’s Mrs Lan. My teacher who is walking there is Mrs Lan. My teacher walking there is Mrs Lan. * Form :. S + V-ing + O + be + O / name. b. V-ed form : Ex : Those stamps are collected. They are $ 1,000. Those stamps which are collected are $1,000 Those stamps collected are $ 1,000 Ex : This pen is made in Viet Nam.It’s 10,000d This pen which is made in VN.

(197) is 10,000 This pen made in Viet Nam is 10,000 dong. * Form : S + Ved/ p1 + O + be + O c. Feed back: 5’ Ask ss to tell the main grammar points that they have to review by drawing a mind map d. Home work 1’ Learn by heart grammar structures and vocabulary. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period. 104 REVISION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss should be able to review and systemize some main languages of the school year such as gerunds or to-infinitive after some verbs and adjectives followed by a noun clause. b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: SS like English 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’.

(198) * Introduction: To review grammar structures and vocabulary we will study in this lesson b. The new lesson: Time 12’. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions I. Gerunds after some verbs T(?) What is a gerund ? 1. Common verbs followed by a What verbs are usually gerund: followed by a gerund ? like* dislike enjoy love* Ss: Answer. hate T: Gives comments and compliments. Then reminds Ss of 2. Form: these verbs orally once again and S + V + gerund. (Vshows them the handout with the ing) list, form and some examples. e.g1: I like reading/to read. Ss: Look, listen and write. e.g2: He enjoys dancing. T: Explains to Ss what to do and asks them to complete the sentences individually in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. T: Calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Ss: Look, listen and write.. 3. Practice: Exercise one: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets to complete the following sentences: a. Ba likes (drive) a lot. b. Nga liked (play) volleyball. c. Tuan enjoys (listen) to music. d. Nam hates (learn) English. e. Kien dislikes (cook). f. Do you enjoy (surf) the web ? g. Does Lan like (watch) TV ? No, she doesn’t. She (like) playing video games. h. What do they like (do) in their free time ? T(?) What is a “to-infinitive” ? i. Sam hated (brush) his teeth when What verbs are usually he was small. followed by a “to-infinitive” ? j. Does he love (eat) ? Ss: Answer. Yes. He (love) eating a lot. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then reminds Ss of II. To-infinitive after some verbs the these verbs orally once again (14’) and shows them the handout with 1. Common verbs followed by a “tothe list, form and some examples. infinitive”.

(199) Ss: Look, listen and write. T: Explains to Ss what to do and asks them to complete the sentences individually in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. T: Calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Ss: Look, listen and write. T(?) Can anyone of you name any adjectives followed by a noun clause ? Can you give any examples ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then reminds Ss of these adjectives orally once again and shows them the handout with the list, form and some examples. Ss: Look, listen and write. T: Explains to Ss what to do and asks them to complete the sentences in pairs in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. T: Calls on some Ss to write his/her answer on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) Do you agree ? Why/Why not ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Ss: Look, listen and write.. promise plan decide hope seem appear ... 2. Form: S + V + (not) to do smt. (toinfinitive) e.g1: He promised to give me 10 dollars. e.g2: What do you plan to do next weekend ? I plan to visit Ha Long Bay.. 3. Practice: Exercise one: Complete the sentences below using the words: a. Hung / hope / go / abroad/ further education. b. It / fine / last Sunday, so I decide / go for a walk / the park. c. On the weekend, Mai / plan / redecorate / house. d. Last time / she promise /not / do / that again. e. Did / you / promise / repay / me ?. III. Adjectives followed by a noun clause (12’) 1. Some adjectives followed by a noun clause: sorry sure afraid certain pleased delighted 2. Form: S + be + adj + (that) clause. e.g1: I’m sure that I’ll win the match. e.g2: We are sorry we didn’t tell you about that.

(200) 3. Practice: Exercise one: Complete the following sentences using the suggested words: a. Thu / delighted / she / pass / exam. b. Peter / afraid / he / not / old / enough / apply / job. c. you / certain / train / not / arrive / yet ? d. Her parents / disappointed / she / lazy. e. I / pleased / you / behave / well. c. Feed back: 2’ Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again d. Home work 1’ Learn by heart grammar structures and vocabulary REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: / / 2014 Date of teaching: 8A1: 14 /5//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2:14 /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3:14 /5/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: 14/5/2014. Period. 105 THE SECOND TERM TEST Time : 45 minutes 1.The aims of the lesson a. Knowledges: Check ss’ knowledges, vocabulary and structures for the whole school year. - Vocabulary: review all vocabulary - Structures: all the tenses and structures.

(201) b.Skills: reading, vocabulary, grammar and writing . c.Education : Educate students to be truthful 2. Preparations a.Teacher: photo the tests b. Students: review well. 3. Matrix MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết TNKQ. Pronunciation. TL. Thông hiểu. Vận dụng. TN TL KQ. cấp độ thấp. Cộng cấp độ cao. Choose the word that The underlined part pronoun different.. 5 câu = 1,5 đ. ( 5 cau = 1,5 ). =15 % Vocabulary and grammar structure. ( Choose the best answer) 10 câu = 2 đ. (Complete the sentences with corect verb form). 15câu = 3,5đ 35 %. 5 câu = 1,5 đ Reading. (Read the passage then answer the questions. 5câu = 2đ = 20%. 5 câu x 0,4 =2đ Writing. Put the Rewrite words in the the right order sentences. 10 câu.

(202) Tổng. 15 câu = 3,5 đ 5 câu = 1,5đ = = 35 % 15%. 5 câu = 2 d = 20 %. 5 câu = 1,5 đ. 5 câu = 1,5 đ. =3đ. 5 câu -= 1,5 đ = 15%. 5 câu = 1,5 đ. 35. = 15 %. 30 %. câu= 10đ =100 %. PHÒNG GD & ĐT MAI SƠN TRƯỜNG THCS CHẤT LƯỢNG CAO. CỘNG HÒA XÃ HỘI CHỦ NGHĨA VIỆT NAM Độc lập – Tự do – Hạnh phúc. ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút ( không kể thời gian giao đề) ( học sinh làm bài trực tiếp trên đề) Name: …………………………………………………….. Class: 8.. Mark. The techer’s remarks. A.PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word in which the underlined part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group. (1,5pts) 1. A. Christmas B. chemistry C. challenging 2.A. representative B. departure C. institute 3. A. Proud, B. Sound, C. Count, 4. A. Soon, B. Moon, C. Afternoon, 5.A. teammate B. claim C. Participate. D. architect D. limestone D. Should D. Door D. pomegranate. B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES: I. Choose the best answer a,b,c,or d to complete these sentences: 2 pts 1. My friend Nancy is not very keen music. a. at b. on c. in d. up 2. This film is not ....................... for young children. a. interesting. b. convenient c. suitable. d. protective. 3. I take part ……………….. most youth activities of my school . a. of b. on c. to d. in 4. Jane saw her old friend while she ……………….……... the street . a. crossed b. is crossing c. was crossing d. crosses 5. He had his father ………………....his watch . a. fixed b. fixing c. to fix d. fix 6.. I saw him ………………....the flowers in the garden . a. watering b. watered c. be watered d. be watering 7. Paul is said ………………….. the brightest student in the class ..

(203) a. was. b. to be. c. being. d. he was. 8. Let’s ………….. to the festival together. a. going b. go c. went d. to go 9. I don’t know what ………………………. for my sister’s birthday. a. buy b. bought c. buying d. to buy 10. Good hygiene helps to ………………………. the risk of infection. a. elevate b. minimize c. revive d. maximize II.Complete the sentences with correct form of the verbs in the blanket: 1,5 pts 1. He ( give ) ……………………me the letter a few minutes ago. 2. They ( make ) …………………… a lot of furniture next month. 3. Peter and Alice ( learn ) …………………… French for two years. 4. Would you mind if I ………………………..( smoke) ? 5. When she came, I ………………………….. ( have) dinner C. READING: Read the passage then answer the questions: 2 pts Tet holiday is celebrated on the first day of the Lunar New Year in Vietnam. Some weeks before the New Year, the Vietnamese clean their houses and paint the walls. New clothes are bought for the occasion. One or two days before the festival, people make Banh chung, which is the traditional cake, and kinds of jam. On the New Year’s Eve, the whole family get together for a reunion dinner. Every member of the family should be present during the dinner in which many different kinds of dishes are served. On the New Year morning, the young members of the family pay their respects to the elders. And the children receive lucky money wrapped in red tiny envelopes. Then people go to visit their neighbors, friends and relatives. 1. When is Tet holiday celebrated in Vietnam? …………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Do they make Banh chung one or two days before the festival? …………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What do they do on the New Year’s Eve? …………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Who receives lucky money? …………………………………………………………………………………… 5. Do they visit their neighbors, friends and relatives on the New Year morning? ……………………………………………………………………………………… D. WRITING: I. Complete the unfinished sentences in such away that they mean the same as those printed above them. (1,5pts) 1. He has collected these stamps for two years. These stamps ………………………………………………………………. 2. “I am a student.” said Nam..

(204) Nam said …………………………………………………………………… 3. Going fishing with friends and family is fun It’s …………………………………………………………………………… 4. May I turn on the TV? Would you mind ……………………………………………………………? 5. “ Have you ever been to Japan?”, she asked him She asked …………………………………………………………………… II. Put the words in order to complete the sentences:1,5 pts 1. mind/ Would/ sitting/ in/ front seat/ taxi/ of/ the/ you/the/? ……………………………………………………………………………… 2. is/ always/ playing/ He/ computer/ games/. ……………………………………………………………………………… 3. while/street/ Jane/ old friend/ met/ walking/ her/on/ was/ the/she ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. inviting/ Thank you/ me/ to/ festival. /rice- cooking/ for/ the/. ………………………………………………………………………………. 5. Nhi/ what/ told/ do/ Nga/ to/ ……………………………………………………………………………… ĐÁP ÁN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KÌ II. MÔN: TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 A. PRONUNCIATION: I. Choose the word in which the underlined part is not pronounced the same as those in the other words of the group. (1,5pts) ( 0,3 X 5) 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. D B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES: I.Choose the best answer a,b,c,or d to complete these sentences: 2 pts ( 0,2 X 10). I.. 1. b 2. c 3. d 4. c 5. d 6. a 7. b 8. b 9. d 10. b Complete the sentences with corect form of the verbs in the blanket: 1,5 pts ( 0,3 x 5). 1. gave 2. will make 3. hane learned 4. smoked 5. was having C. READING: Read the passage then answer the questions 2 pts( 0,4 x 5) 1. Tet holiday is celebrated on the first day of the Lunar New Year in Vietnam.

(205) 2. Yes, they do 3. On the New Year’s Eve, the whole family get together for a reunion dinner 4. the children receive lucky money wrapped in red tiny envelopes 5. Yes, they do D. WRITING: I. Complete the unfinished sentences in such away that they mean the same as those printed above them 1,5 pts( 0,3 x 5) 1. These stamps have been collected by him for two years 2. Nam said that he was a student 3. It’s intersting to go fishing with friends and family. 4. Would you mind if I turned on the TV? 5. She asked him if he had ever been to Japan II. Put the words in order to complete the sentences:1,5 pts1,5 pts ( 0,3 x 5) 1. Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? 2. He is always playing computer games 3. Jane met her old friend while she was walking on the street 4. Thank for inviting me to the rice- cooking festival. 5. Nhi told Nga what to do.. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(206) Date of preparing: /. / 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /4//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /4/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /4/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching:. 8A1: /3//2014.

(207) Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson:.

(208) a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary.

(209) 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions.

(210) c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: ...................................................................................................................

(211) Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A3: /3/2014 Date of teaching: 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 15 // 2014. Date of teaching: 8A1: /3//2014 Date of teaching: 8A2: /3/2014.

(212) Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. 8A3: /3/2014 8A4: /3/2014. Period. UNIT 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills : All four skills but pay attention to speaking and writing skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Introduction: b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ d. Home work 1’ REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(213)

(214)

(215) Date of preparing: 9 /10/ 2012 12/10/2014. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. Period 18. 8A1: 8A2:15 /10/2014 8A3:13 /10/2014 8A4: 13/10/2012. REVISION AND CONSOLIDATION. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit to Unit 3 + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “personal information” + Structures :.

(216) - “adj + enough + to(infinitive)” - “Be going to” - Adverbs of place - Modals - Reflexive pronouns - Why? Because… b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate SS to study hard 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Enough:. Students’ actions 1.“be(not) + adj + enough+ to(V). Ask ss to retell some forms and uses. “have/has + enough+ N + to (V). of “adj + enough + to(infinitive)”. “don’t/ doesn’t have+ enough+ N + to (V) Three groups make and show out. 8’. 2. Future be going to: Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss discuss to make examples Remark and correct Ask the class to retell the use, forms of “be going to” and make 3 examples on the board Remark and correct. 5’. 3. Adverbs of place:. their sentences 2. “be going to + V) S + be going to V +… S + be + not going to V +… Be + S + going to V +…? Eg: She is going to play chess tonight She isn’t going to play chess tonight Is she going to play chess tonight? 3. Adverbs of place here, there, inside, outside, upstairs,.

(217) downstairs Eg: I am inside 7’. 4. Reflexive pronouns. 4. Reflexive pronouns. Ask the class to retell the adverbs of place Remark and correct. Ask the class to retell the use of. I you he she it we you they. myself yourself himself herself itself ourselves yourselves themselves. reflexive pronouns Remark and correct. 5. Modals: “must, have to and ought to” S + Modals + V(infi)…. 8’. 5. Modals: “must, have to and. Eg: He must go now She ought to come soon. ought to”. Listen and answer Ask the class to retell the use of each modal verb Remark and correct 5’. 6. Why?...Because….. 6. Why?...Because…. Eg: - Why did he come to school late? - Because he got up late - Because he missed the bus. Ask the class to retell the use of “Why”- questions and how to answer them Remark and correct c. Feed back: 2’ Ask ss to tell the main grammar points that thay have to review d. Home work: 1’.

(218) Ask SS to review grammar structures, vocabularies in unit 1,2,3 for the test next time.Do again exercises in 3 units REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:10 /10/ 2012 8A1:13/10/2012. Period 19:. Date of teaching:. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: TEST 45 MINUTES. 8A2:16 /10/2012 8A3:15 /10/2012 8A4:16 /10/2012. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss’ vocabulary, grammar and knowledges from unit 1 to unit 3 + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 3 + Structures: - “adj + enough + to(infinitive)” - “Be going to” - Adverbs of place - Modals - Reflexive pronouns - Why? Because… b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate SS to learn hard and be honest in doing test 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: copy the test b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson:.

(219) 1. Matrix of test Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết TNKQ TL. Thông hiểu TNLQ. TL. Vận dụng TN TL. Cộng. KQ Listening. Making. 5 câu =. arrange. 2đ. ment. = 20 %. Fill the missing words 5x 0,4=2 Grammar. My friends,. My friends,. 13câu. and. making. making. = 4đ. vocabulary. arrangement,. arrangement,. 40 %. at home. at home. ( multi choice). ( verb form). 8 câu x 0,25 =. 5 cau = 2d. 2đ Reading. My friends ( Answer the questions. 4câu =. 4 câu x 0,5) =. 2đ. 2. = 20% Writing. My friends ( write a paragraph to describe 7 câu = your. 2đ. friend). 20 %. 7 cau = 2 Tổng. 5 câu =. 8 câu = 2 đ. 2đ. = 20 %. = 20 %. d 5 câu = 2. 32 c =. cau. đ. 10. =4. = 20 %. =100%. 5 câu = = 15 % 9.

(220) d =4 0%. WRITTEN TEST Subject : English Time : 45 minutes Name :........................................................................ Class 8A1 I. LISTENING Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) Trung: Hello. This is (1)………………………. Linh:. Can I (2) ........…………………… to Trung, please? This is Linh. Trung: Hello, Linh. How are you? Linh:. I’m fine. I’m going to see a (3)………………… Would you like to come?. Trung: Which play is it? Linh:. It is Easy life. Do you like it?. Trung: Yes. What time can we..............................(4)? Linh:. Is 6.45 ok? The play (5).........………………………at 7.00. Trung: All right. See you at 6.45 Linh:. Bye, Trung.. II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1. She looks at …………. in the mirror. A. her. B. herself. C. himself. D. Myself. 2. She asked me ……. her with her homework A. help. B. helps. C. to help. D. Helping. 3.I think you……… to buy that book, it’s very interesting. A. must. B. ought. C. should. 4. The moon …………. at night. A. shines. B. will shine. C. shine. D. is shining. C. to carrying. D. Carrying. 5. Let me ……….. your bag. A. carry. B. to carry.

(221) 6. Miss Suong has ……………… A. black long hair. B. a long black hair C. long black hair D. a long black hair. 7. Lan: Where is Tuan? Hoa: He is ………… . A. in front of. B. opposite. C. in. D. Upstairs. 8. Thu isn’t .......... ride a motorbike to school. A. enough old to B. old enough to. C. old enough for. D. enough old for. II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts) 1.Duong usually ( come ) ..................................to the school library three times a week. 2.His father (check)..................................... the washing machine yesterday. 3.My younger sister, Tien enjoys ....................................( tell ) jokes. 4.She ( write ) ........................................a letter to her old friends last night. III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points Of all my relatives, I like my aunt Emily the best. She’s my mother’s youngest sister. She has never married and lives alone in a small village near Bath. She’s fifty years old, but she’s quite young in spirit. She has a fair complexion, thick brown hair and dark brown eyes. She has a kind face, and when you meet her, the first thing you notice is her smile. Her face is a little wrinkled now, but I think she is still rather attractive. She is the sort of person you can always go to if you have a problem and she’s extremely generous. She likes reading and gardening, and she still goes for long walks over the hills. I hope I’m as active as she is when I’m her age. 1. How old is she?  ……………………………………………………………………………………. 2. What does she look like?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. What is she like?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. What does she like doing in her free time?  ……………………………………………………………………………………...

(222) IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… * KEY: I. LISTENING: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) 1. 0915806127 2. speak 3. play 4. meet 5. Will start II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1.B 2. C 3.B 5. A 6. C 7. D II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts). 4.A 8. B. 1. Comes 2. checked 3. telling 4. wrote III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points 1. She is 50 years old 2. She has a fair complexion, thick brown hair and dark brown eyes. 3. She is generous 4. She likes reading and gardening. IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points SS answer WRITTEN TEST : 45 minutes.

(223) Subject : English Name :........................................................................ Class 8A2 I. LISTENING: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) Trung: Hello. This is (1)………………………. Linh:. Can I (2) ........…………………… to Trung, please? This is Linh. Trung: Hello, Linh. How are you? Linh:. I’m fine. I’m going to see a (3)………………… Would you like to come?. Trung: Which play is it? Linh:. It is Easy life. Do you like it?. Trung: Yes. What time can we..............................(4)? Linh:. Is 6.45 ok? The play (5).........………………………at 7.00. Trung: All right. See you at 6.45 Linh:. Bye, Trung.. II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1.Ngan usually ……………..in bed late on Sundays. A.stay. B.stays. C.will stay. D. stayed. 2.A home for children whose parents are dead is………………………. A.a hotel. B.a school. C.an orphanage. D.a restaurant. 3.Where do you live, Thuy? I live…… 26 A Nguyen Du street. A.of. B.on. C.in. D.at. 4.He is my………. .We are in the same class. A.father. B.principal. C.character. D.classmate. 5.Last week , my younger sister……………….to school for the first time. A.comes. B.come. C.came. D.is coming. 6.Nam is tall enough …………….volleyball A.play. B.playing. C.to play. D.played. 7. “Would you……………. to go to the movies with me?” “ I’d love to” A.like. B.want. C.love. 8.She is not…………….enough to carry that box.. D.do.

(224) A.strong. B.slim. C.beautiful. D.thin. II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts) 1.I usually ( come ) ..................................to the school library three times a week. 2.His father (have )..................................... a bad cold yesterday. 3.My younger sister, Tien enjoys ....................................( tell ) jokes. 4.He bought a new ball yesterday. He.......................................(play) soccer this afternoon III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points Of all my relatives, I like my aunt Emily the best. She’s my mother’s youngest sister. She has never married and lives alone in a small village near Bath. She’s fifty years old, but she’s quite young in spirit. She has a fair complexion, thick brown hair and dark brown eyes. She has a kind face, and when you meet her, the first thing you notice is her smile. Her face is a little wrinkled now, but I think she is still rather attractive. She is the sort of person you can always go to if you have a problem and she’s extremely generous. She likes reading and gardening, and she still goes for long walks over the hills. I hope I’m as active as she is when I’m her age. 1.How old is she?  ……………………………………………………………………………………. 2.What does she look like?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. What is she like?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4.What does she like doing in her free time?  ……………………………………………………………………………………... IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * KEY: I. LISTENING: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ).

(225) 1. 0915698172 2. speak 3. play 4. meet 5. will start II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1.B 2. C 3.D 5.C 6. C 7. A II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts). 4.D 8.A. 1. Comes 2. had 3. telling 4. is going to play III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points 1. She is 50 years old 2.he has a fair complexion, thick brown hair and dark brown eyes. 3.She is generous 4.She likes reading and gardening. IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points SS answer WRITTEN TEST : 45 minutes Subject : English Name :........................................................................ Class 8A3 I. LISTENING Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) Trung: Hello. This is (1)………………………. Linh:. Can I (2) ........…………………… to Trung, please? This is Linh. Trung: Hello, Linh. How are you? Linh:. I’m fine. I’m going to see a (3)………………… Would you like to come?.

(226) Trung: Which play is it? Linh:. It is Easy life. Do you like it?. Trung: Yes. What time can we..............................(4)? Linh:. Is 6.45 ok? The play (5).........………………………at 7.00. Trung: All right. See you at 6.45 Linh:. Bye, Trung.. II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1. He looks at …………. in the mirror. A. her. B. herself. C. himself. D. Myself. 2. She asked me ……. her with her homework. A.to help. B. helps. C. help. D. Helping. 3.I think you……… to buy that book, it’s very interesting. A. must. B. ought. C. should. 4. The moon …………. at night. A. shines. B. will shine. C. shine. D. is shining. C. to carrying. D. carrying. 5. Let me ……….. your bag. A. carry. B. to carry. 6. Miss Suong has ……………… A. black long hair B. a long black hair C. long black hair D. a long black hair 7. Lan: Where is Tuan? Hoa: He is ………… . A. in front of. B. opposite. C. in. D. Upstairs. 8. Thu isn’t .......... ride a motorbike to school. A. enough old to B. old enough to. C. old enough for. D. enough old for. II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts) 1.Duong usually ( watch ) ..................................TV in his freetime 2.I (do)..................................... the washing up yesterday. 3.My younger sister, Tien enjoys ....................................( tell ) jokes. 4. She ....................................(have) to wear glasses because she is short – sighted..

(227) III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points Viet is a student and he lives in a house in a suburb of HaNoi. It’s apart of an old house . He has one room and a kitchen and share a bathroom with three other people . In his room, there is a bed on the left hand side . There is an armchair beside the bed.The desk is opposite the bed and there is a closet on the right side of the room . Above the desk , there is a bookshelf and above the bed there is a clock. He has a tv and a hi-fi , too. In the kitchen, there is a cooker on the right hand side. The sink is near the cooker . There’s a small table and two chairs in the center. The kitchen is small , but it’s ok. Viet like his room very much 1.Where does Viet live? =>.................................................................................................... 2.How many people share the bathroom with Viet? =>.......................................................................... 3.What is there on the right side of the room ? =>................................................................................... 4.Where is the cooker? =>........................................................................................................ IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about your friend with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points ……………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… * KEY: I. LISTENING: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) 1. 0915768142 2. speak 3. play 4. meet 5. will start II. Vocabulary and grammar structures:.

(228) I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1.C 2. A 3.B 5.A 6. C 7. D II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts). 4.A 8.B. 1. Comes 2. had 3. telling 4. is going to play III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points 1. He lives in a house in asuburb of Ha Noi 2. 3 other people share the bathroom with him 3. There is a closet on the right side of the room. 4. The cooker is on the right hand side IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points SS answer WRITTEN TEST Subject : English Time : 45 minutes Name :........................................................................ Class 8A4 I. LISTENING Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) Trung: Hello. This is (1)………………………. Linh:. Can I (2) ........…………………… to Trung, please? This is Linh. Trung: Hello, Linh. How are you? Linh:. I’m fine. I’m going to see a (3)………………… Would you like to come?. Trung: Which play is it? Linh:. It is Easy life. Do you like it?. Trung: Yes. What time can we..............................(4)? Linh:. Is 6.45 ok? The play (5).........………………………at 7.00. Trung: All right. See you at 6.45.

(229) Linh:. Bye, Trung.. II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1. She looks at …………. in the mirror. A. her. B. herself. C. himself. D. Myself. 2. She asked me ……. her with her homework A. help. B. helps. C. to help. D. Helping. 3.I think you……… to buy that book, it’s very interesting A. must. B. ought. C. should. 4. The moon …………. at night. A. shines. B. will shine. C. shine. D. is shining. C. to carrying. D. Carrying. 5. Let me ……….. your bag. A. carry. B. to carry. 6. Miss Suong has ……………… A. black long hair C. long black hair. B. a long black hair D. a long black hair. 7. Lan: Where is Tuan? Hoa: He is ………… . A. in front of. B. opposite. C. in. D. Upstairs. 8. Thu isn’t .......... ride a motorbike to school. A. enough old to B. old enough to. C. old enough for. D. enough old for. II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts) 1.Duong usually ( come ) ..........................to the school library three times a week. 2.His father (check)..................................... the washing machine yesterday. 3.My younger sister, Tien enjoys ....................................( tell ) jokes. 4.She ( write ) ........................................a letter to her old friends last night. III. Reading: Read the passage carefully then write True (T) or False (F) for each statement: (2pts).

(230) Xuan is fourteen years old.She is a pretty girl with long black hair.She goes to school five days a week and usually goes swimming with some friends on Saturday mornings.She lives in a large house with her mother, father and younger brother at 2/34 Tran Hung Đao street.Xuan has a lot of friends.Of all her friends,Nga,Dung and Thuy are the ones she spends most of her time with.They all like listening to music and playing sports in their free time. Questions: 1. How old is Xuan? 2. What does she look like? 3. How often does she go to school? 4. Who does she live with? IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * KEY: I. LISTENING: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the missing word (2 points ) 1. 0915698172 2. speak 3. play 4. meet 5. will start II. Vocabulary and grammar structures: I. Choose the correct answer: ( 2 marks ) 1.B 2.C 3.B 5.A 6. C 7. D II.Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. ( 2pts) 1. Comes 2. Checked 3. telling. 4.A 8.B.

(231) 4. wrote III. Reading: Read the text then answer the questions: 2 points 1. She is fourteen 2. She is pretty with long black hair 3. She goes to school five days a week 4. She lives with her mother, father and younger brother IV. Writing: Write a paragraph about you with the information: name, age, address, characters, appearance, family, friends: 2 points SS answer d. Remark: Advantages .......................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................... ........................................................ .. ......................................................... Date of preparing:13 /10/ 2012 10/2012. Disadvantages ................................................................. ................................................................. ................................................................. ................................................................. ................................................................. ................................................................. ................................................................. Date of teaching: 8A1:17 / Date of teaching: 8A2: 17 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 17 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4: 18 /10/2012. Period 20:. UNIT 4 : OUR PAST. Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to know about the things Nga’s grandparents did in the past - Standard: Practice the dialogue and answer the questions, then check the boxes - Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue.

(232) + Vocabulary: look after(v) ; great grandma(n); meal (n); sound(v) ; electricity(n); modern(a); equipment(n) ; story(n); folktale (n); traditional (a) + Structures : - Past simple tense - “used to” - Prepositions of time: on, in, at…. b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to look up to their grandparents and parents 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ - Check the preparing lesson of ss. T: gets ss play game “slap the board” Ss: play game Play game farm. young girl. go to shool help. stay story. life home wash. T: The remark & the winner T: My country is more and more devolope. The life is more and more stable and fuller. now we can see again VN 100 years ago by look at the picture in the book. What do you see? - To know them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 5’. Teacher’s actions 1.Getting started:. Students’ actions. - Lets Ss look at the picture (P.38). - Discuss and name. and name the things that don't. 1. The answers :. belong to the past.. a. The television..

(233) b. The radio / stereo. c. The mobile phone. d. The electric lights. e. Modern clothes / School uniforms. - Listen and correct. - Remarks. 20’. 2. Listen and read:. - Listen and remember.. - Introduces the topic of the lesson.. - Predict. - Lets Ss look at the picture and. - They are Nga and her grand. predict :. mother.. + Who are they ?. - They are talking about.... + What are they talking about ?. - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss listen to the tape.. - Listen and copy down.. - Teaches explain the new words in. 2. New words.. the lesson.. - To look after. - explain.. - To sound (v) nghe như, có vẻ như. - explain.. - Traditional. - explain.. - Great-grandma (n) cụ. - explain.. - A folktale (n) chuyện cổ tích, dân. - explain.. gian. - Lets Ss practice reading.. - Practice reading.. - Lets Ss play the game " Rub out. - Play the game.. (v). chăm sóc. (adj) truyền thống.. and remember".with the newwords. - Remarks.. - Listen.. - Lets Ss repeat the past simple. - Repeat the structure. tense.. - Listen and copy down.. - Introduces the structures with. 3. Form :. "Had to" and "Used to". S + Used to + V-infinitive (thói quen trong quá khứ) S + Had to + V-infinitive.

(234) ( Trách nhiệm, bổn phận trong quá khứ) - Makes some examples to explain.. - Listen and copy down.. - Lets Ss listen to the dialogue.. - Listen.. - Lets Ss listen again and repeat in. - Listen and repeat.. chorus.. - Practice reading.. - Lets Ss practice reading the. - Practice in front.. dialogue. - Calls some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks.. - Read and answer the questions.. - Lets Ss read the dialogue again. - Give out the answers.. and answer the questions.. - Listen and copy down.. - Calls some Ss to give out the. 4. The answers :. answers in front. a. She used to live on a farm.. - Corrects the mistakes .. b. Because she had to stay home and help her mom. c. She used to cook the meals, clean the house and wash the clothes. d. Her great-grandma used to light the lamp and her great-granddad used to tell stories. e. She asked her grandma to tell her the tale "The lost shoe". - Listen carefully. - Give out the answers in front . - Listen and copy down. 5. The answers : a. Fact. b. Fact..

(235) 10’. 3. Futher practice :. c. Fact.. - Explains the asking and lets Ss do. d. Fact.. Ex 3 (P.39). e. Opinion.. - Calls some Ss to give out the. f. Opinion.. answers in front .. - Listen and do the exercise.. - Corrects the mistakes with the. - Listen and copy down.. whole class. c. Feed back: 3’ - Remarks and summarizes the contents of the lesson. + the structure with used to, had to + the content of the dialogue between the Nga and her great – grand mother. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the new words and the structures. + Read fluently the dialogue. + Prepare next lesson :. Unit 4 : Speak REMARKS:. Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 14 /10/ 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1:19/ 10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:22 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 18 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:20 /10/2012. Period 21: UNIT. 4 : OUR PAST. Lesson 2: Speak + listen 1. The aims of the lesson:.

(236) a. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson, Ss should be able to talk about past events and listen to the tale and choose the right moral lesson. b. Skills: Speak + listen c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to look up to their family members 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit b. The new lesson: Time 7’. Teacher’s actions I. Speaking: 1. Pre - speaking :. Students’ actions 1. The differences between life in the past and now:. - Lets Ss repeat the structure with. - Listen and repeat.. "used to" to express past habits.. - Make some examples to explain.. - Asks some Ss to make some. - Listen.. examples to explain.. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks.. - Listen and compare.. - Gives out the pictures and introduces the topic of the speaking. - Gives out the prompts and lets Ss make comparison between the past and the present life. + Houses + Roads + Transport + Clothes. Past - cottages. Present - Tall buildings.. - small,. - large, modern. narrow.. - Car, motorbike.. - Walks. - Modern,.

(237) + Children. - Traditional. uniform.. + Entertainments. - stay home. - Go to school. + Electricity. - catch. - watch T.V. + Work. - No.. - Yes. - on a farm. - in the houses /. - Remarks 10’. 2. While - speaking : - Explains the asking of Ex 1(P. 40) - Lets Ss practice speaking with a partner using T's prompts. + S1: Talk about the past(using "used to") + S2: Talk about present events.. buildings. - Listen and copy down. - Listen and remember. - Practice with a partner. 1. Example Exchanges : S1: In the past, people used to live in the cottages. S2: Now they live in the big houses or tall buildings. S1: In the past, They used to walk. S2: Now they can go by cars, motorbikes,... S1: In the past, there used to be no electricity. S2: Now there is. S1: In the past, people used to work very hard in the fields. S2: Now they work in big,beautiful shop or tall buildings. S1: In the past, they used to go to the market. S2: Now they go to supermarket. .etc... - Practice in front.. - Calls some pairs to practice in.

(238) front of the class.. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks . 5’. 3. Post - speaking : - Lets Ss explain the asking of Ex 2. - Listen carefully and explain. - Listen and do the exercise.. (P. 41).. Example :. - Remarks and lets Ss do the. S1: I used to play computer games. exercise ( talk about their past. last year. Now I work hard all day.. habits using "used to " in chain. S2: Last year, I used to play soccer. reaction).. with my friends. Now I play volleyball. S3: Last year, I used to stay up late. Now I go to bed early. S4: etc... - Listen and remember. - Do the exercise.. - Remarks.. 2. The answers:. - Explains and lets Ss do Ex 6 (P. 30 1. Long used to fly the kites when he - workbook).. was a child. 2. He used to swim in the pool . 3. He used to climb the trees. 4. He used to listen to music. 5. He used to go fishing. 6. He used to get up late. 7. He used to get bad marks.. 5’. - Corrects the mistakes.. - Listen and check.. II. Listening:. 2. The folktale:. 1. Pre - listening : - Introduces the topic of the lesson. - Teaches explain the new words in. 1. New words. the listening.. - Foolish (adj). ngu ngốc.

(239) - explain. - Greedy (adj tham lam). - explain. - To lay eggs (v). - explain. - Excitedly (adv)kêu lên. - explain. - Amazement (n). - explain. - A moral lesson (n)bài học về đạo. lấy trứng ngạc nhiên. đức - Lets Ss practice reading the new. - Practice and play the game.. words and play the game "Slap the board".. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks.. - Listen and repeat.. - Lets Ss repeat the past simple. - Read the sentences and predict.. tense. - Give out True/False Exercise and lets Ss predict the answers . * True or False ? Correct the false. - Try to guess.. sentences 1. The farmer had a lot of chickens. 2. The farmer's wife discovered one of the chickens laid a gold egg. 3. The husband wanted more gold eggs. 4.The husband cut open all the chickens to find more gold eggs.. 10’. 5. The farmer found many gold. - Listen carefully.. eggs.. - Listen and check. 2. While - listening :. - Lets Ss listen to the tape.. - Share and compare the answers. - Lets Ss listen again and check. with a partner.. their predictions.. - Give out the answers. - Lets Ss share and compare the.

(240) answers with a partner.. - Listen and check.. - Calls some Ss to give out the. - Listen and copy down.. answers in front of the class.. 4. The answers :. - Lets Ss listen again to check.. 1. T. - Corrects the mistakes with the. 2. F ( The farmer's wife The. whole class.. farmer) 3. F ( The husband The wife) 4. T 5. F ( found many  Didn't find. 5’. 3. Post - listening :. any). - Lets Ss discuss and give out the. - Discuss and give out the moral. exactlymoral lesson of the folktale.. lesson. - Remarks.. (b. Don't be foolish and greedy.). - Lets Ss give out the title of the. - Listen and copy down.. folktale.. - Give out the title in their own. - Lets Ss listen to the tape again .. opinion. - Listen carefully.. c. Feed back: 2’ - Remarks and summarizes the contents of the lesson. - Talk about things used to. d. Home work: 1’ Guides Ss to: + Learn by heart the structure. + Do Ex 4,5,6 (P. 35,36,37 - workbook) + Prepare next lesson: read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(241) Date of preparing:20/10/ 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1:24/10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:23 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:22 /10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:23/10/2012. Period 22 UNIT 4: OUR PAST Lesson 3: Read 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the tale “ The lost shoe” - Standard: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions (exercise 2) - Higher : Write a summary of the tale + Vocabulary: Little Pea (n); Stout Nut (n); die (v) ; marry (v); cruel (a); upset (a); festival (n); harvest (n) ; prince (n); fairy(n); rag(n); drop(v); loose(v); own(v). + Structures: Past simple b. Skills: Reading-comprehension: Read and complete the sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions (exercise 2) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty and kindness 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Question: Talk about the things you used to do when you were small. Use the information in the table below.. What ? go to school read a comic play marbles. When or how ? foot recess after school.

(242) go fishing Begin with : When I was small, I .... free time. Answer key: When I was small, I used to go to school on foot. At recess, I used to read a comic. After school, I used to play marbles. In my free time, I used to go fishing. * Warm-up (1’) T(?) Do you like folktales ? What tale do you like best ? Ss: Answer. T: Introduces the lesson and writes the title on the board. Ss: Listen and write. b. The new lesson: Time 10'. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre - reading :. Students’ actions. - Repeats the situation of the dialogue between Nga and her. - Listen and remember.. grandma. - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen and remember.. reading by asking Ss some questions.. Listen and answer the questions. + Have you read the story "The lost shoe" ? + What can you guess from the title of the story ? - Lets Ss guess the characters in the story by answer the pre-question :. - Guess the characters in the story.. + How many characters are there in the story ? Who are they ? 15'. 2. While - reading : - Lets Ss listen to the passage.. - Listen carefully. - Read the passage and give out the. - Lets Ss read the passage again and answers..

(243) answer the pre - question.. (the farmer, the stepmother, Little Pea, Stout Nut, the prince, and the fairy.). - Remarks and teaches the new. - Listen and copy down.. words in the lesson.. 1. New words:. - explain. Cruel (adj). - explain. To marry (v). - explain. To drop (v). - explain. Magically (adv) kì diệu. - explain. A fairy (n). - explain. Rags (n) quần áo rách. - explain. Upset (adj) buồn phiền, thất vong. - explain. To fall in love (v) yêu. - Lets Ss practice reading and play. - Practice and play the game.. the game "Matching" with the new. - Listen and remember.. độc ác cưới đánh rơi ông bụt. words. - Remarks.. - Read the passage and give. - Lets Ss read the passage and give. information about three characters :. information about three characters :. 1. Little Pea (Hạt đậu nhỏ). 1. Little Pea (Hạt đậu nhỏ). 2. Stout Nut (Hạt dẻ lớn). 2. Stout Nut (Hạt dẻ lớn). 3. Stepmother (Người mẹ kế). 3. Stepmother (Người mẹ kế) - Remarks.. - Listen and copy down. - Read and explain clearly.. - Lets Ss read and explain the asking of Ex1 (P.42) .. - Do Ex 1(P.42).. - Lets Ss read the passage and do Ex - Share and compare. 1. - Lets Ss share and compare the. - Give out the answers in front.. answers with a partner. - Calls one students to give out the. - Listen and copy down..

(244) answers in front.. 2. Practice. - Corrects the mistakes with the. * Exercise 1 (P.42):. whole class.. a. farmer. b. died. c. used - again. d. marry / choose. e. new clothes f. lost. - Read the passage and answer the. - Lets Ss read the passage again and questions in Ex 2. answer the questions in Ex 2(P.42) in groups of four.. - Give out the answers in front.. - Calls Ss to give out the answers in - Listen and copy down front.. * Exercise 2 (P.42):. - Corrects the mistakes.. a. She was a poor farmer's daughter. b. She made Little Pea do the chores all day. c. Before the festival started, a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes. d. The prince decided to marry the girl who fitted the lost shoes.. 3. Post - reading:. 10'. - Lets Ss discuss and answer the questions: + Do you like the story ? + Who do you like / hate ? Why ? + Is this a true story ? How do you know?. - Discuss and answer..

(245) + What is the moral lesson from. - Listen and copy down.. the story - Remarks and gives out the moral lesson. - Retell the story.. " One good turn deserves another".. - Listen.. ( ở hiền gặp lành). - Listen and copy down.. - Lets Ss retell the story with the. - Listen and remember.. roles of a character in the tales. c. Feed back: 2’ T: Calls on a Ss to retell the tale to class using the word cues below. Once / farmer / daughter / Little pea / marry / again / wife / die / unfortunately / cruel / upset / broken heart / harvest festival / prince / wife / new clothes / fairy / rags / clothes / drop / decide / fit / Little pea. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) What’s the moral lesson from the tale ? Ss: Answer. T: Summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once. Then encourages Ss to be good and helpful to each other. d. Home work: 2’ + Learn by heart all the newwords. + Retell the story. + Do exercises 5,6,7 page 37,38 in the work book + Prepare next lesson : Unit 4 : Write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(246) Date of preparing: 20/10/ 2012. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. 8A1:25 /10/2012 8A2:23 /10/2012 8A3: 24/10/2012 8A4:23 /10/2012. Period 23 UNIT 4: OUR PAST Lesson 4: Write 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a story using word cues and the model story - Standard: write a story using word cues and the model story - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the story + Vocabulary: graze (v); appear(v); leave(v); say(v); tie(v); ; light(v); escape(v); servant(n); master(n); wisdom(n); return(v); straw(n); bring(v); stripe(n) + Structures: Structure of describing the position On the other side In the right corner b. Skills: - Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model story - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the story c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and love reading folktales 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ b. The new lesson:.

(247) Time 10'. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre - writing :. Students’ actions. - Introduces the situation of the writing.. - Listen carefully.. - Gives out some questions.. - Predict and answer the questions.. + Who are the 3 characters in the story ?. + The farmer, the buffalo, and the tiger.. + Where did they meet ?. + In the farmer's field.. + What was the buffalo doing ?. + (Ss' answers). - Teaches the new words in the. - Listen and copy down.. lesson.. 1. New words:. - explain. - To graze (v) gặm cỏ. - explain. - To tie (v) trói, buộc. - explain. - To escape (v)trốn thoát. - explain. - servant (n) đầy tớ. - explain. - master (n) ông chủ. - explain. - stripe. - explain. - Wisdom (n) trí khôn. - explain. - Straw. - explain. - To appear (v) xuất hiện. - Lets Ss practice reading and play. - Practice reading and play the. the game "Matching".. game.. (n) sọc vằn (n) rơm rạ. - Explains the asking of Ex 1 (P.42,43). - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss discuss in groups and do. - Do the Ex1 in groups of four.. the exercise. - Calls some Ss to give out the. - Give out the answers .. answers in front. - Remarks and corrects the mistakes Listen and copy down. with the whole class.. 2. The answers :.

(248) - Calls one or two Ss to read clearly. 1. appeared. 2. was. 3. said. 4. left. 5. went. 6. tied. 7. lit. 8. burned. the whole story in front of the class. 9. escaped. - Read clearly in front. 15'. 2. While - writing : - Lets Ss read and explain the asking of. Ex 2(P. 43).. - Remarks and explains the cue-. - Read and explain clearly.. words. - Lets Ss discuss and write the story - Listen and remember. in groups of four.. - Discuss and write the story with. - Goes round and gives help if. the role of the farmer.. necessary.. - Listen.. - Calls Ss to give out their answers. - Give out the answers in front. in front.. - Listen and copy down.. - Corrects and gives out the. 3. Example :. example.. One day as I was in the field and my buffalo was gzaring nearby, a tiger came. It asked why the strong buffalo was my servant and I was its master. I told the tiger that I had something called wisdom . The tiger wanted to see it, but I told it I left the wisdom at home that day. Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn't wanted it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw that I said was my wisdom and I.

(249) burned the tiger. The tiger escaped but today it still has black stripes from the burns. 10'. 3. Post - writing : - Calls one student to read clearly the example in front.. - Read clearly in front.. - Asks Ss discuss and give out the moral lesson of the story.. - Discuss and give out the moral. - Remarks.. lesson.. - Lets Ss to retell the story with the role of the buffalo or the tiger (if. - Listen and copy down.. enough time).. - Retell the story.. - Remarks - Listen carefully. c. Feed back: 2’ T(?) What do you think about the farmer ? What do you think about the tiger ? What’s the moral lesson from the story ? T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the new words. + Retell the story. + Prepare next lesson : Unit 4 : Language Focus. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:21/10/ 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1:26/10/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:24 /10/2012.

(250) Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. Period 24. 8A3:25 /10/2012 8A4:25/10/2012. UNIT 4: OUR PAST. Lesson 5: Language focus 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Past simple - Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between - “Used to” - Standard: Write the past form of the irregular verbs Make questions for the answers Complete the sentences using the prepositions of time Complete the dialogue using the verb “used to” - Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions + Vocabulary: news(n) + Structures: Prepositions of time: on, in, at, after, before, between Past form of the irregular verbs “Used to” b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Ss should be taught to be interested in the subject, hardworking 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ - Check the preparing lesson of ss. * Warm up: - Lets Ss play the matching game with some verbs. * Matching :.

(251) Infinitive run. Past Form was/were. fly. rode. take. came. go. went. have. had. do. ran. be. did. ride. sat. eat. took. sit. ate. come. flew. - Play the game - Listen and remember. - In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 25’. Teacher’s actions 1. Language Focus - Lets Ss repeat the formations of the past simple tense.. - Asks Ss to make some examples to explain. - Remarks. - Lets Ss write the sentences in the past tense using the verbs in Ex 1 (P.44) by playing the game " Noughts and Crosses". Eg : RunRan (He run very fast yesterday.). Students’ actions I. The Past Simple Tense and used to: - Listen and repeat. +) S + V-ed / Did. - ) S + didn't + V- infinitive ? ) Did + S + V- infinitive ? Yes, S + did. No, S + didn't. - Used + V- inf - Make the examples. - Listen and copy down. - Write the sentences fly have take do go be. ride eat sit.

(252) - Remarks. - Explains the asking of Ex 2 (P.44). - Lets Ss do the exercise with a partner. - Calls some pairs to practice in front. - Remarks and gives out the answers.. - Lets Ss repeat the structure with "Used to" - Asks Ss to make some examples to explain - Remarks and lets Ss do Ex 4 (P.45). - Calls some pairs to practice in front. - Remarks and gives out the answers. 10'. - Listen and remember. - Listen carefully. - Do the exercise. - Practice in front. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 2 (P.44) : a, Did you eat fried rice for breakfast yesterday ? b, I go to school by bike. c, Where were you last night ? d, I had Math. - Listen and repeat. - Make some examples to explain - Listen and do the exercise. - Practice in front. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 4 (P.45) : 1. Used to have. 2. Used to be. 3. Used to live. II. Prepositions of time : - Play the game. - Listen carefully. - Do the exercise. - Listen and copy down * Exercise 3 (P.44) : b. in c. between d. at - after e. before. - Lets Ss repeat all the prepositions of time by playing the game "Networks". - Explains the asking of Ex 3 (P.44). - Lets Ss do the exercise. - Do the test. - Corrects the mistakes - Do the exercise 2. Production : - Lets Ss to do the multiple choice exercise ( Test 10 minutes) - Asks Ss to do some more - Listen exercises in workbook. + Ex 3 (P.28 - workbook) + Ex7 (P.31 - workbook) - Remarks c. Feed back: 3’. T(?) Which tense do we use to talk about past events ?.

(253) Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Ss: Listen. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the structures + Redo all the exercises + Prepare next lesson : Unit 5 :Getting started + Listen and read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing:22/10/ 2012 8A1:27/10/2012. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. 8A2: 29/10/2012 8A3:29 /10/2012 8A4:25 /10/2012. Period 25: 45 MINUTE TEST CORRECTION 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to have their texts corrected and they can review what they could not do and know the way to improve the knowlege in the next lessons + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 1 to unit 3 + Structures: - “adj + enough + to(infinitive)” - “Be going to” - Adverbs of place - Modals.

(254) - Reflexive pronouns - Why? Because… b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be truthful 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: give points to the tests b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ b. The new lesson: I. Comments (5’) T: Gives comments on students’ tests and turns out the papers to them. Ss: Listen and look through the papers. T: Asks Ss if they have any more ideas. Ss: Answer. II. Discussion (5’) T: Divides class into groups to discuss the answers with each other in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. III. Correction (30’) T: Calls on some Ss to write the answers on the board. Ss: Do as T says. T(?) What do you think about it ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Shows Ss the answer key of the test. Ss: Look and write it in their notebooks if necessary. c. Feed back: 2’ T: Summarizes the main languages mentioned/available in the test orally once again and encourages Ss to try harder. Ss: Listen..

(255) d. Home work: 2’ Review grammar structures in the test and try to do the test again Prepare unit 5 getting started + listen and read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:2710/ 2012 8A1:31/10/2012. Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching: Date of teaching:. Period 26. 8A2:30 /10/2012 8A3:31 /10/2012 8A4:30 /10/2012. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS. Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to know about the results of studying thatv Tim did this semester - Standard: Practice the dialogue and tick the True or False sentences then answer the questions - Higher: Give some reports about what Miss Jackson said to Tim’s mother + Vocabulary: report card(n) ; proud(a) + of ; improve (v); pronunciation(n) ; sound(n); promise(v) + Structures : - Past simple tense - Comands, requests, and advice in reported speech - Modal: should b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board.

(256) b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Call 2 SS to write names of subjects at school T correct and give marks b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ 1. Getting started.. ?. Students’ actions 1. Your schedule:. T: Ask ss to look at the picture and. - Practice with a partner.. ask.. We have math five time a week.. How often do you have math? Ask ss to practise in pairs. - Example Exchanges : A: How often do we have English ? B: We have English three time a week. - Listen and remember.. 25’. 2. Listen and read. - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen carefully.. dialogue.. - Listen and copy down.. - Teaches the new words in the. 1. New words:. lesson.. - Excellent (adj). - explain. - A semester (n) kì học. - explain. - Pronunciation (n) phát âm. - explain. - To improve (v) nâng cao. - explain. - To be proud of : tự hào về. - explain. - Practice and play the game.. xuất sắc. - Lets Ss practice reading and play the game "What and Where" with. - Listen and remember.. the new words.. - Listen and copy down.. - Remarks.. 2. Structure: Reported Speech.. - Introduces the structures in the. a. S + said +(that)+ S + Should +.

(257) lesson : "Reported Speech".. V- infinitive Eg: Lan said that you should work hard on your English.. b. S + asked + O + To- infinitive. eg: Lan asked me to give you this book. - Practice. - Listen and copy down. - Listen - Lets Ss practice reading the. - Listen and repeat. examples. - Remarks. - Lets Ss listen to the tape.. - Practice with a partner.. - Lets Ss listen again and repeat the dialogue in chorus.. - Practice in front.. - Lets Ss practice reading the dialogue with a partner.. - Listen and remember.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. - Read and explain clearly.. front of the class. - Remarks.. - Do the exercise. - Lets Ss read and explain the. - Give out the answers in front.. asking of Ex 2 (P.47). - Lets Ss do the exercise.. - Listen and copy down.. - Calls some Ss to give out the. 3. The answers for exercise 2:. answers in front.. a. F. b. T. c. F. - Corrects the mistakes with the. d. T. e. F. f. T. whole class and gives out the answers.. - Read and answer. - Practice in front..

(258) - Listen and copy down - Lets Ss read the dialogue again. 4. The answers for exercise 3 :. and answer the questions in Ex 3.. a, She is Tim's teacher.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. b, She gave Tim 's mother his report. front.. card.. - Remarks.. c, He studied very well. d, She said Tim should word harder on his Spanish pronunciation. e, She gave him a dictionary.. - Listen and corrct their mistake.. - Listen and remember.. c. Feed back: 3’ (?) Who are talking with each each other ? What are they talking about ? Is Tim a good student ? What does Tim need to improve ? What should you do to improve your study ? Ss: Answer. T: Summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Then encourages them to try their best to study. Ss: Listen. d. Home work: 2’ - Review the lesson. - Write the dialogue between Tim and his mother and translate it in to Vietnamese in your exercise book once. - Exercise 1,5,6,7 in the work book - Prepare for the next lesson: speak + listen. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: ...............................................................................................................

(259) Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 280/ 2012. Period 27. Date of teaching: 8A1:2/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:31/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:1/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:2/11/2012. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS Lesson 2: SPEAK. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Make questions and answers about their studies - Standard : Make questions and answers about their studies - Higher:. Ask some questions about the dialogue. + Vocabulary: grade(n); miss(v) ; due to(conj); sickness(n); attendance(n); participation(n); co-operation(n); satisfactory(a); listening comprenhension; encourage(v); cassette(n); borrow(v); appreciate(v) + Structures: Past simple tense b. Skills: + Speaking: Make questions and answers c. Education: Educate SS to study hard 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5 * Questions: - write the new words on the board. - Read the dialogue aloud before the class. * Answers: + - Excellent (adj) xuat sac - A semester (n) ky hoc - Pronunciation (n) phat am.

(260) - To improve (v)nang cao - To be proud of : tu hao ve cai gi, ai + 2 Students read aloud before the class. * Mark:. - 5 x 2 = 10 - Read correctly and fluently = 10. * Warm up : - Lets Ss play the game "Networks" with the topic "Subjects at school" SS: math, class, days present, reading, writing, speaking, listening.... - Remarks. - In order to morre understand them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 8’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre - speaking :. Students’ actions - Listen carefully.. - Explains the asking of the. - Read in silence.. speaking.. - Listen and copy down. - Lets Ss read the questions and the. 1. New words:. cue words.. - To help (SO) with (smt): giúp đỡ. - Explains the new words and some. ai làm gì. difficult words.. - To spend (time) on. Giành thì gian vào việc gì - Read and answer.. - Lets Ss read the questions and 20’. answer with their own information.. - Listen and remember.. 2. While - speaking :. - Listen and copy down.. - Repeats the asking of the speaking. - Makes an example with a student to explain. - Gives out the table and explains.. - Listen carefully..

(261) Questions 1.When do. S1 after. Name S2 S3 S4. you do your school. homework ? parents 2. Who. ..... helps you to do your homework ? - Lets Ss work in groups and. - Practice in groups. - Practice in front. 2.Practice : A: When do you do your homework ? B: I do my home work after school. C : ...........after dinner.. practice.. D: ............late at night.and you ?. - Calls some groups to practice in. A: ...in the early morning. Who. front of the class.. helps you to do your homework ? ...ect. - Listen and remember. - Listen and repeat. S + said + ( that) + S + V-ed - Listen and copy down. Example :. - Listens and checks 3. Post - speaking : 8’. Ba said that he did his homework after dinner.. - Lets Ss repeat the structure of the. - Report the survey.. reported speech.. 3. Futher practice.:. - Makes an example to explain.. 1. Basaid that his parents helped him to do his homework. 2. Ba said that he spent about 2 hours on Math.. - Lets Ss report the survey with the. 3. Ba said that he needed to improve. information in the table.. his English. 4. Ba said that he read English.

(262) stories to improve his English. - Calls some Ss to give out the. ...etc.. answers in front of the class.. - Give out the answers in front.. - Calls some pairs to practice in front.. - Listen and copy down.. - Remarks. c. Feed back: 2’ T(?) Are you good at English ? How do you study English ? How much time do you spend on English everyday ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Ss: Listen d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the newwords. + Complete the report card. + Prerare next lesson : read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:29/10/2012. Period 28. Date of teaching: 8A1:3/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:3/11/2012. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS Lesson 3: LISTEN. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge:.

(263) + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Listen to dialogue and complete the report card - Standard : Listen to dialogue and complete the report card - Higher:. Ask some questions about the dialogue. + Vocabulary: grade(n); miss(v) ; due to(conj); sickness(n); attendance(n); participation(n); co-operation(n); satisfactory(a); listening comprenhension; encourage(v); cassette(n); borrow(v); appreciate(v) + Structures: Past simple tense b. Skills: Listen to the conversation and fill the information in the report card c.Education: Educate ss to learn hard, learn and revise the new words regularly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre - listening :. Students’ actions 1. New words:. - Introduces the situation of the. - Behavior-participation (n) thái độ. listening through the report card in. tham gia. the textbook.. - Co-operation (n) hợp tác, xây. - Teaches the new words in the. dựng bài. lesson.. - Satisfatory. - explain. - unsatisfactory(adj) Không đạt. - explain. - To encourage (v)khuyến khích. - explain. - To appreciate (v) đánh giá. - explain. - Listen carefully and read after. - explain. teacher.. - read and guide ss read. - Read and predict the information.. (adj) đạt yêu cầu.

(264) - call some ss read aloud before the class. - Listen and correct their mistake. - Explains the information in the report card.. - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss read and predict to. - Listen and check.. complete the report card. 2. While - listening :. 15’. - Share and compare the answers .. - Lets Ss listen to the tape. - Lets Ss listen again to check their. - Listen again and check.. predictions.. - Give out the answers in front.. - Lets Ss share and compare the. - Listen and copy down.. answers with a partner.. 2. The answers :. - Lets Ss listen again to check.. 1. 87 days. 2. 5 days. - Calls Ss to give out the answers in 3. S. 4. C. front.. 5. A. 6. A. - Corrects the mistakes.. 7. B. 8. Miss Blake.. - Listen carefully. - Look at the report card. - Lets Ss listen all the tape again. 3. Post - listening : 10’. - Practice with a partner.. - Gives out the completed report. 3. Practice :. card in the listening.. A: How many days was she absent. - Lets Ss practice talking about. from class ?. Sarah Chen using the informations. B: She was absent 5 days.. in the listening.. ...etc.. - Asks Ss to write the comments of. - Practice in front.. Miss Blake to talk about Sarar. - Write the comments.. Chen's report card. Example: This is Sarah Chen 's report card..

(265) It's a good report. She did very well. She has worked very hard ... Her reading and... excellent. And ...good. She's not good at......etc. c. Feed back: 3’ Resay the content of the lesson. How to fill information in a report card. The way to study d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the newwords. + Complete the report card. + Prerare next lesson : read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................................... Date of preparing:31/10/ 2012 Date of teaching: 8A1:6/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2: 5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:4/11/2012 Period 29. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS Lesson 4 : Read. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about how students learn new words - Standard: Understand the new words, scan the text and find out the main ways that language learners use to learn new words, tick the true or false sentences - Higher: Answer some additional questions + Vocabulary: list (n); meaning (n); mother tongue (n) ; learn …by heart (v); stick (v); so as to (conj); come across (v); underline (v) ; highlight (v); revise(v); revision(n); necessary(a); piece of paper, term(n)..

(266) + Structures: Present simple b. Skills: Reading-comprehension: Scan the text and make a list of things that language learners use to learn new words c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, learn and revise the new words regularly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Question: Calls on a Ss to talk about his/her study habits. Use the questions and cues below. - What’s your favorite subject ? English - When do you do your homework ? evening - How much time do you spend on English ? two hours a day - Which grades did you get for English last year ? good Start like this: Of all my subjects, I .... Answer key: Of all my subjects, I like English best. I usually do my homework in the evening. I always spend about two hours each day on English. Last year, I got good grades for it, but my speaking is still not very good. My teacher said I should work harder on my English pronunciation. * Warm-up T: Introduces the lesson and writes the title on the board. Ss: Listen and write. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 11 * Pre- reading: - Introduces the topic of the lesson.. Students’ actions.

(267) - Teaches the new words in the. - Listen and remember.. lesson.. - Listen and copy down. 1. New words:. - explain. - To learn by heart (v) học thuộc. - explain. lòng. - explain. - To stick (v). - example. - To revise. - example. - To underline(v) gạch chân. - explain. - To highlight (v) đánh dấu. - Lets Ss practice reading and play. - Necessary (adj) cần thiết. the game with the new words.. - Practice and play the game. - Explains the structures in the. "Matching". dán (v) ôn tập. lesson. - Listen and copy down. 2. Structure: a. S + should + V-infinitive b. S + V ...+ in order to/ so as to + V 20’. * While – reading:. - Read and explain clearly.. Asks S to read the passage in silent and do exercises. - Predict the answers.. - Lets Ss read and explain the. - Listen carefully.. asking of Ex 1 (P.50) : True or. - Read the passage and check. False ?. - Remarks and lets Ss read and predict the answers.. - Give out the answers in front.. - Lets Ss listen to the tape. - Lets Ss read the passage and check - Listen and copy down. their predictions.. 3. True or False ? a. F (All  some).

(268) - Calls some Ss to give out the. b. T. answers in front.. c. F (tries  doesn't try). - Corrects the mistakes.. d. T - Read and answer the questions. - Practice in front. - Listen and copy down. 4. Answer the questions :. - Lets Ss read the passage again and a. No, they don't. answer the comprehension. b. Because such sentences help them. questions.. remember the use of newwords.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. c. They write examples, put the. front.. words and their meanings on. - Listens and checks.. stickers, underline or highlight them. d. They may think they can't do so. Instead, they learn only important words. e. Revision is necessary in learning words.. 5’. * Post – reading:. f. We should try different ways of. How should you learn words?. learning words to find out what is the best.. - Lets Ss discuss and give out the best way to learn words.. - Discuss in groups.. - Remarks. - Listen and check. c. Feed back: 2’ T(?) How can we learn words ?.

(269) Ss: Answer. T(?) What do you think about it ? Does any one of you have any more ideas ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. Encourages Ss to try different ways of learning words to find out the best one for them. Ss: Listen. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the newwords and the structures. + Read and translate the passage into Vietnamese. + Do Ex 8, 9 in the work book + Prepare next lesson : Unit 5 : Write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 30 /10/ 2012. Period 30. Date of teaching: 8A1:6/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2: 5 /11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 5 /11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4: 4 /11/2012. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABITS Lesson 5 : Write. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a formal letter using word cues and the model letter - Standard: write a letter using word cues and the model letter - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter.

(270) + Vocabulary: enjoyable (a); result(n); The Lunar New Year Festival(n); celebrate(v); regards(n); + Structures: Structure of a formal letter b. Skills: Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model letter Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and care about their friends 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Question: Calls on a Ss to talk about how he/she usually learns words. Use the cues below. Always Usually Often Sometimes Answer key:. learn by heart and write example sentences with important words. write words in small cards and put them at study corner. do lexical exercises. look up new words in a dictionary.. Hello. My name’s Nam. My favorite subject is English. Everyday, I always learn by heart and write example sentences with important words. I usually write words in small cards and put them at my study corner. I often do lexical exercises. Sometimes, I look up new words in a dictionary. * Warm-up (1’) T: Introduces the lesson and writes the title on the board. Ss: Listen and write. b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 10’ * Pre- writing:. Students’ actions 1. Form of an informal letter. ?. How many parts are there. 1. Heading: The writer’s address and the. in an informal letter?. date.

(271) ?. What do you write in each. 2. Opening: Dear…,. part?. 3. Body of the letter 4. Closing: Your friend/ Regards/ Love. Asks SS to read the letter. Read and explain clearly.. from Hoa to Tim and match.. 20’. Ss read and explain the. - Listen and copy down.. asking of. - Practice writing the letter.. Ex 2 (P. 51).. - Read clearly their letter in front.. - Remarks and explains the. - Listen and check.. cue words.. Example :. * While writing:. Dear Donna,. - Lets Ss practice writing. Thank for your letter. I’m pleased to hear. the letter. - Calls 2 Ss to write on the. you had a happy Mother’s Day. I received my second semester report last. board. month. Igot good grades for Geography,. - Remarks and gives. Physics and Math, But my English and. suggested answers.. History results were poor. My teacher told me to improve my English and History. I think I’ll have to study harder next schoolyear. In a few weeks, we’re going to celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival. That’s a moon festival in Vietnam. I’m going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus this afternoon and I’m going to stay there with them until after the festival. I’ll send you a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news. Best wishes,.

(272) Lan. * Post- writing: 5’. Ask SS to write another. SS write. letter c. Feed back: 3’ (?) How is an English letter organized ? Ss: Answer. T(?) What do you think about it ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then encourages them to make friends more and more and love our national traditions and customs. Ss: Listen. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the newwords. + Complete the letter. + Prepare next lesson : Unit 5 : Language Focus. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 31 /10/ 2012. Period 31. Date of teaching: 8A1:6/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2: 4/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:4/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:3/11/2012. UNIT 5 : STUDY HABBITS. Lesson 6 : Language focus 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge:.

(273) + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Adverbs of manner - Modal: should - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Standard: Complete the dialogues using the adverbs of manner Report the sentences - Higher:. Report some morre sentences. + Vocabulary: soft(a); office(n); conversation(n); passage(n); pronounce(v) sore throat(n) + Structures: - Adverbs of manner - Modal: should - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendly, look up to their friendship 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ - Check the preparing lesson of ss. * Warm up : - Lets Ss repeat the leading grammar structure in Unit 5. - Give out the formations of the structures. * Reported Speech : - S + asked + O + to do (smt) - S + told. + O + to do (smt). - S + said + (that) + S + should + do(smt). - Make the examples. - Listen and remember..

(274) - In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 15’. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions I. Grammar:. 1. Language Focus :. 1. Adverbs of manner. - Ask ss retell the form, use of the. - Trang tu chi the cach duoc thanh. adverb of manner.. lap bang cach them duoi “ ly ” vao sau 1 tinh tu. Eg: bad => badly - Co mot so truong hop dac biet: + hard => hard + fast => fast. - T presents the way to change the. direct to indirect.. 2. Reported speed * Formation: S + asked. + O + to-infinitive.. Told Ordered * Thay đổi đại từ nhân xưng, tính từ sở hữu, tân ngữ Đổi thì simple present simple past present. progressive=>. progressive future => future in the past. -This => That -These => Those -Here => There -Now => Then -Today => That day -Tonight => That night. past.

(275) -Tomorrow => The next day -Yesterday => The day before -Last night => The night before. II. Exercises: 20’. 2. Exercises. 1. Exercise 1. - Lets Ss read and explain the asking of Ex 1 (P.52).. - Read and explain.. - Lets Ss complete the dialogues with a partner.. - Listen and copy down.. - Calls some pairs to practice in front.. - Complete the dialogue.. - Listen and checks.. - Listen and practice. - Listen and copy down. * Answers 1. hard. 2. fast.. 3. badly. 4. softly.. - Lets Ss read and explain the. 4. Exercise 3 (P.53):. asking of Ex 3 (p.53).. a. Miss Jackson told me to wait for. - Explains the example.. her outside her office.. - Lets Ss do the exercise.. b. Miss Jackson told me to give you. - Corrects the mistakes.. your report card for this semester. c. Miss Jackson asked me to help you with your Spanish pronunciation. d. Miss Jackson asked me to meet her next week. - Listen and remember. - Listen and do the exercise. - Give out the answers..

(276) - Listen and copy down. - Explains the asking of Ex 4 (p.53). - Lets Ss discuss and do Ex 4.. 5. Exercise 4 (P.53):. - Calls some Ss to give out the. a. Miss Jackson said you should. answers in front.. spend more time on Spanish. - Corrects the mistakes.. pronunciation. b. Miss Jackson said you should practice speaking Spanish everyday. c. Miss Jackson said you should listen to Spanish conversations on T.V. d,e....etc. - Do the exercises. - Listen.. c. Feed back: 3’ - Summarizes the contents of the lesson. + Adverb of manner + Modal should. + Reported speed. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures. + Redo all the exercises. + Prepare next lesson.Unit 6 : Getting Started + Listen and read. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(277) Date of preparing:1/11/ 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1: 7/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:5/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4: 6/11/2012. UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB. Period 32. Lesson 1: Getting started + Listen and read 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to know about the things that ss have to do when enrolling for an activity at school in the summer - Standard: Practice the dialogue and complete Nga’s details - Higher: Ask some questions about Nga + Vocabulary: enrol(v) + for ; application form(n); fill (v); hobby(n) ; draw(v); sign(v); bring(v); interest(n) + Structures : - Past simple tense, present simple with future meaning - Gerunds: V(ing) - Modal: may, can, could b. Skills: concentrate on listening and speaking skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and take part in outdoor activities regularly 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Warm up: T(?) What activities do you think the Y&Y usually organize for Vietnamese teenagers to do ?.

(278) Ss: Answer. T: Shows Ss the handout of the given activities and asks them to discuss with a partner and check the boxes in a few minutes. Ss: Do as T says. T: Calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board.. Helping blind people Helping elderly people Helping handicapped children Cleaning up beaches Caring for animals Taking part in sports b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. 1. Presentation :. .. - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen and remember. dialogue.. - Listen and copy down.. - Teaches the new words in the. 1. New words:. lesson. - explain.. - Application (n). - explain.. - To enroll (v). - explain.. - To fill out (v). - explain.. - Interest (n). - Lets Ss practice reading and play. - Practice and play the game.. the game “Rub out and remember” with the newwords. - Remarks.. - Listen. - Introduces the structures in the. - Listen and copy down.. lesson.. 1. Modals. 2.Gerunds.. - Asks Ss to make some example to. - Make the examples .. explain.. - Listen and remember..

(279) - Remarks. 14’. 2. Practice : - Lets Ss listen to the tape.. - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss listen again and repeat in. - Listen and repeat.. chorus.. - Play the roles and practice reading.. - Lets Ss play the roles and practice reading the dialogue with a partner.. - Practice in front.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. - Listen and remember.. front.. - listen and complete the form.. - Listens and checks. - Explains and lets Ss complete. - Give out the answers.. Nga’s details. - Calls some Ss to give out the. - Listen and copy down.. answers in front.. * The answers :. - Remarks.. Name. : Pham Mai Nga. Date of birth : April 22, 1989. Home address : 5 Tran Phu St. Sex. : Female. Phone Number: Not available Interests and. : Drawing, acting, outdoor activities.. - Complete the details. 11’. 3. Production : - Lets Ss complete the details about. - Listen and check.. themselves the same as Nga.. - Listen and do the exercise.. - Remarks. - Explains the asking and lets Ss do. - Give out the answers.. Ex 6 (P.42 – Workbook).. - Listen and copy down..

(280) - Calls some Ss to give out the. The answers :. answers .. a. coming ;. - Listens and checks.. driving.. b. playing ; c.. d. swimming ; e. repairing ; f. talking. g. sewing ;. h. working ;. i.recycling. j. practicing.. k. cooking ;. l. high-jumping, running ; m. learning. c. Feed back: 3’ T(?) What activities do you think The Y&Y usually organize for Vietnamese teenagers to do ? What’s Nga going to do this summer ? What are her hobbies ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work: 2’ - Review the lesson. Write the dialogue and translate it into Vietnamese once. - Write a passage about the things that your school Y&Y usually organize for you and your friends to do. - Exercise 1,2,3 in the work book - Prepare for the next lesson, Speak and Listen. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:2/11/2012. Period 33. Date of teaching: 8A1: 9/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2: 6/11/2012 Date of teaching:8A3:7/11/2012 Date of teaching:8A4:9/11/2012. UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB.

(281) Lesson 2 : Speak + Listen 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance - Listen to song “Children of the World unite” and fill in the missing words - Standard : Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance Listen to song and fill in the missing words - Higher:. Sing the song. + Vocabulary: favor(n); of course; assistance(n); offer(v); respond(v); may(v); unite( v) shout(v); hold(v). + Structures: Modals: can, could, may b. Skills: + Speaking: Ask for and respond to favors, offer and respond to assistance + Listening: Listen to the song and fill in the words c. Education: SS like learning English 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 4’ Ask ss to play the game "Networks" Divide the students into two teams and ask them to play Think of the modal verbs. Can. Can Modals. Modals.

(282) b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 7’ *Pre- speaking:. Students’ actions 1. New words. Introduces the aim through the table favor(n) Asks ss to look at the models and. of course. the suggested answers in the table. assistance(n) offer(v) respond(v) may(v). Asks ss to repeat the new words in. Repeat the new words in chorus. chorus. Listen and check. Asks 2 ss to read. Correct by themselves. Remarks and corrects the mistake. 2. Structures. Presents the new structures to ask. Asking for. Responding to. for and respond to the favors. favors - Can/ Could. favors - Certainly/ Of. you help me?. course/ Sure. - Could you do - No problem me a favor?. - What can I do. - I need a favor for you? - How can I help you? - I’m sorry. I’m busy Repeat the new structures in chorus Asks ss to repeat the new structures in chorus Asks 2 ss to read Remarks and corrects the mistake Presents the new structures to offer. Listen and check Correct by themselves Asking for. Responding to. assistance - May I help. assistance - Yes, that’s. you?. very kind of you.

(283) and respond to the assistance. - Do you need. - No thank you. any help? - Let me help you. Asks ss to repeat the new structures in chorus Asks 2 ss to read. Repeat the new structures in chorus Listen and check Correct by themselves. Remarks and corrects the mistake 15’. *While-speaking Asks ss work in pairs to ask for and. Pairwork. respond to favors. Asks 6 pairs to practice. Observe, listen and remark. Remarks and gives out the correct answers 5’. * Pre-listening. Observe and listen carefully. Hangs the extra board and presents the situation: Now listen to the song “ Children of the World unite” and. Listen carefully. fill in the missing words Asks ss to discuss about the. Pairwork. structures of a song Asks ss to read the song and guess the words in some blanks Asks ss to give out their ideas Explains the meaning of : unite, hold, peace, right, stand, show, north, south, world, 8’. *While-listening. 3. Listen Listen carefully and complete the.

(284) Plays the tape ( 3 times). card. Asks ss to give out their answers. Share and compare with their. Asks others to remark. partner. Remarks and gives out the correct. Observe and correct. answers. Correct by themselves * Key: 1) unite 2) peace 3) right 4) love 5) north 6) south 7) of 8) world 9) show 10) place 11) out 12) stand. 2’. * Post-listening Asks ss to sing the song c. Feed back: 2’. 13) world Sing together. Resay the content of the lesson. Asking for favor and offerring for assistance. The song. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the new words. + Practice singing the song. + Do exercises 5,6 in the work book. + Prepare next lesson Unit 6 : Read. - Remarks and summarizes the contents of the lesson..

(285) REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing: 3/11/ 2012. Period 34. Date of teaching: 8A1:10/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:7/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 8/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:10/11/2012. UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 3 : Read. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about Y&Y - Standard: Fill in the missing information and answer the questions - Higher: Answer some additional questions + Vocabulary: build (v); citizenship (n); skill (n) ; organization (n); social (a); develop (v); awareness (n); personality (n) ; guideline (n) + Structures: Present simple and past simple b. Skills: Reading-comprehension: c. Education: : Educate ss to learn hard, take part in communicative acivities 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ - T ask ss some questions.

(286) ? What social activities does the Youth Union in Viet Nam often do? They often helping, cleaning... ? Do you know any Youth organizations in Viet Nam beside the Youth Union? Youth pioneers organization... ? Do you know any social activities these organizations carry out? - Ss try to answer by Viet Namese. - In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre – reading : - Introduces the topic of the lesson. Students’ actions - Listen and predict the answers.. by asking Ss some questions. ?. Do you enjoy singing ?. - Yes, I do. ?. Do you know any songs of Y&Y ?. - Yes, I do. Do you know any organizations. - No, I don’t.. similars to the Y&Y in other. - ss answer.. ?. countries ? What are they ?. 18’. - Teaches the new words in the. 1. New lesson.. lesson.. - Listen and copy down.. - explain.. - social (a) xã hội. - explain.. - Citizenship (n) quyền công dân. - explain.. - awareness (n) hiểu biết. - explain.. - Fitness. - explain.. - Volunteer(n) người tình nguyện. - explain.. - personality(n) phẩm chất, tính. - Lets Ss practice reading and play. cách. the game with the new words.. - Practice and play the game.. - Remarks.. - Listen and rememner.. 2. While – reading :. (n) thích hợp. 2. Reading:. - Lets Ss read the passage and check - Read and check.

(287) their predictions. - Lets Ss read and explain the. - Read and explain.. asking of Ex 1 (p.57) - Remarks and lets Ss do the. - Listen and do the exercise. exercise.. - Practice in front.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. - Listen and copy down. front.. 2. Exercise1 :. - Remarks and gives out the. a. .....1931. answers.. b. ... December 1976.... c. .....their buplic awareness and form their personality. d. ...... the guidelines.... - Read the passage and answer the questions - Practice in front.. - Lets Ss read the passage again and - Listen and copy down. answer the questions.. 3. Exercise 2).. - Calls some pairs to practice in. a. Any Vietnamese youth from 16 to. front.. 30 years of age can join the Youth. - Remarks.. Union. b. The Youth Union was founded on March 26 1931. c. The complete name of the Youth Union is Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union. d. Some social activities of the Youth Union are helping the Handicapped, Cleaning the Environment, Green Summer Volunteer Campaign....

(288) e. These activities aim to help the young develop their public awareness and form their personality. f. Ho Chi Minh president. 8’. - Calls some Ss to read clearly the. established the guidelines for the. passage in front.. Vietamese youth.. - Remarks. - Read clearly. 3. Post – reading :. - Listen and remember.. - Lets Ss to read the passage again and retell the main ideas.. - Read and retell.. - Remarks. - Asks Ss to translate the passage. - Listen and check.. into Vietnamese.. - Translate the passage into. - Remarks.. Vietnamese. - Listen and remember.. c. Feed back: 2’ - Summarizes the contents of the lesson. + The content talk about Ho Chi Minh communist Youth Union in Viet Nam d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the new words. + Read and translate the passage. + Prepare next lesson : Unit 6 : Write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(289) Date of preparing: 8/11/ 2012. Period 35. Date of teaching: 8A1:14/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:12/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 12/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:13/11/2012. UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 4 : Write. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a formal letter using word cues and the model letter - Standard: write a letter using word cues and the model letter - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the letter + Vocabulary: plan (v); community(n); encourage(v); recycle(v); natural resources(n); earn(v); sidewalk(n); register(v); raise fund(v) + Structures: Structure of a formal letter b. Skills: Writing skills: guided writing skills using word cues and model letter.

(290) - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the letter c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and save environment 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions: - Write the new words on the board. - Read the passage aloud before the class. * Answers: - social (a) xa hoi - Citizenship (n) quyen cong dan - awareness (n) hieu biet - Fitness (n) thich hop - Volunteer(n) nguoi tinh nguyen - personality(n) pham chat, tinh cachcua con nguoi. + A student read aloud before the class.  Mark: + 5 x 2 = 10 + Read correctly and fluently = 10 * Warm up: - Asks Ss some questions. + Are you a member of Y&Y ? + What do you often do for your organization ? - Ss try to answer . - In order to know the student’s in America do after school we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre – writing :. Students’ actions. - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen carefully.. passage.. - Listen and copy down.. - Teaches the new words in the. 1. New words:. lesson.. - A sidewalk (n) - Resources (n)nguon. - explain.. - To earn money (v)kiem tien.

(291) - explain.. - Fund. (n) quy, tien quy. - explain.. - To register (v). - explain.. - To recycle (v)tai che. - explain.. - Practice reading.. - explain.. - Listen and copy down.. - Lets Ss practice reading the new words. - ask ss read individually. - Call some ss read aloud before the 2. Structure. class.. 1. S + be + V-ing.. - Listen and correct their mistake.. 2. S + be + going to + V-infinitive.. - Introduces the structures in the. - Make the examples.. lesson : Near future. - Listen and copy down. - Read and predict. - Asks Ss to make some examples to explain. - Remarks. - Lets Ss read the letter and predict. - Read and complete the letter.. the answers. - Share and compare. 15’. 2. While – writing : - Lets Ss read the notice and. - Give out the answers.. complete Nga’s letter. - Lets Ss share and compare the. - Listen and copy down.. answers with a partner.. 3. The answers :. - Calls some Ss to give out the. 1. community.. 6. save.. answers in front.. 2. recycling. 7. raise.. - Corrects the mistakes with the. 3. collect. 8.. whole class.. participating..

(292) 4. send. 9. planting.. 5. recycling.. 10. helping.. - Read clearly. - Listen and remember. - Calls a student to read clearly the letter in front of the class. - Remarks. 10’. 3. Post – reading : - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen and remember. - Read and underline. - Listen carefully.. dialogue. - Lets Ss read the dialogue and. - Discuss and write the letter.. underline the things Hoa is going to do.. - Give out the answers.. - Explains the asking of the exercise in part 2 (P.59).. - Listen and remember.. - Lets Ss discuss and write Hoa’s. - Copy down.. letter to her parents in groups of. 4. Example:. four.. Dear Mom and Dad,. - Calls some groups to give out their I’m very happy to tell you that I’m writing in front.. going to join the Y&Y Green Group. - Remarks .. of my school.. - Gives out the example (if necessary).. The Green Group is holding an environment month plan. We’re going to clean the banks of the lakes on weekends. We’re going to plant trees and flowers in the school garden and water them ....etc..

(293) c. Feed back: 2’ - Retell the leading of the lesson. - Ss: listen and copydown if neccesary. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Complete the letter. + Learn by heart the structures. + Prerare next lesson : Unit 6 : Language focus. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing: 8/11/ 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1:16/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:13/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3: 14/11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:16/11/2012. UNIT 6 : THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Lesson 5: Language focus. Period 36. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Present simple with future meaning - Gerunds - Modals: may, can, could - Standard: Ask and answer about the Y&Y spring activity program Talk about their friends’ hobbies Ask for favors and respond to themby ccompleting the dialogues - Higher:. Make some morre situations to ask for and respond to favors. + Vocabulary: gather(v); support(v); cultural(a); ticket(n); across(prep); orphanage(n) + Structures: - Present simple with future meaning - Gerunds.

(294) - Modals: may, can, could b. Skills: Speaking and writing skills c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and to be friendlyand save the environment 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Questions: - Write the new words on the board. - Read the letter aloud before the class. * Answers: + A sidewalk (n) - Resources (n)nguon - To earn money (v)kiem tien - Fund (n) quy, tien quy - To register (v) - To recycle (v) + A student read aloud before the class. * Mark: + 5 x 2 = 10 + Read corectly and fluently = 10 * Warm up: - Lets play the game “Networks” in two groups. + G1 : Repeat some gerunds. + G2 : Repeat some modals. - Remarks. - In order to more understand them we are going to learn in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time. Teacher’s actions 1. Language Focus :. Students’ actions 1. The simple present with future. 30’. - Lets Ss repeat the usages and the. meaning. meaning of the present simple tense. => Thì HTĐ hàm nghĩa tương lai được dùng để diễn tả sự kiện xảy ra trong tương lai theo thời khóa biểu * Note. diễn tả c trình / sự sắp xếp.

(295) cá nhân trong tương lai, 1 ý định, sự tiên đoán chúng ta phải dùng ‘will, be going to’ Form of the present simple tense. (+) S + V- es - s…….. - Gives out and explains the table in ? do/does + s + V…….? Ex 1(P.60).. * Ex1: S1: When do they collect and empty. - Explains the asking and the. garbage.. examples.. S2: On January.. - Lets Ss practice with a partner to. - Listen and repeat.. do the exercise.. - Read and explain.. - Calls some pairs to practice in front.. - Listen and remember.. - Listens and checks.. - Listen and remember. - Practice with a partner. - Practice in front. - Listen and copy down.. - Lets Ss repeat the meaning of the. 2. Danh độnh từ. gerunds.. - Danh động từ là dạng động từ tận cùng bằng - ing và có chức năng của 1 danh từ, danh động từ có thể làm chủ từ , tân ngữ , bổ từ Eg: Smoking is harmful to health s - He avoids playing with that o naughty child - His son is interested in reading.

(296) o of (prep) book - Lets Ss read and explain the. ex2:. asking of Ex 2 (p.61). - Explains the cue words and the. - Listen and repeat.. examples in part (a). - Lets Ss notice the uses of “but”,. - Listen and copy down.. “and”, “either”and “neither” in the structure.. - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss practice talking about the hobbies using the information in the - Practice with a partner table. - Calls some pairs to practice in. - Listen and practice.. front.. - Listen and copy down.. - Remarks.. - Complete and practice.. - Lets Ss complete the table with their own information and practice.. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks.. 3. Modals: - Câu yêu cầu hay đề nghị. - Lets Ss repeat the expressions to. => Dùng để yêu cầu hay đề nghị gì. ask for a favor.. đó. * Y/c sự giúp đỡ Can/could you + V + O…….? * đề nghị giúp đỡ ai - May I + V…… - let me + V…… - shall I + V……… * Exercise 3 (P.62): - Listen and repeat.. - Lets Ss read and explain the. - Read and explain clearly...

(297) asking of Ex 3 (p.61).. - Do the exercise.. - Lets Ss do the exercise with a. - Practice in front.. partner.. - Listen and copy down.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. a. buy a ticket for me .. front.. b. take me across the road .. - Remarks.. c. help me with this math problem . d. water the flowers in the garden. - Explains and lets Ss do Ex 3b.. - Listen and do the exercise.. - Asks some Ss to give out the. - Give out the answers.. answers.. - Listen and copy down.. - Corrects the mistakes. 2. Production :. - Do the exercises.. - Lets Ss do some exercises in the 5’. workbook.(Ex ,6,7). - Listen.. - Remarks.. c. Feed back: 2’ - Summarizes the contents of the lesson. Ss: listen and copy d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures. + Redo all the exercises. + Prepare next lesson. Test lesson. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ...............................................................................................................

(298) Date of preparing:11 /11/ 2012. Period. 37. Date of teaching: 8A1: 17 /11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A2:14 /11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A3:15 /11/2012 Date of teaching: 8A4:17 /11/2012. REVISION AND CONSOLIDATION. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to review the main grammar points and vocabulary from Unit 4 to Unit 6 + Vocabulary: vocabulary of the theme “personal information” + Structures : - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds b. Skills: speaking and writing. c. Education: SS learn hard. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit.

(299) b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions Students’ actions 10’ 1. Past simple tense, “used to” 1. Past simple tense, “used to” and and present simple with future present simple with future meaning. meaning. Ask ss to retell the use, forms of Ex: I was at home yesterday. She played soccer last week.. past simple and present simple tense. She didn’t play soccer last week. Did she play soccer last week? Yes, she did./ No, she didn’t Divide the class into 2 groups and ask ss discuss to make examples Remark and correct. 2. Prepositions of time 5’. I used to cry when I was a child. I didn’t use to cry...... Did you use to cry...? Yes, I did./ No, I didn’t The film starts at 7 o’clock this evening. 2. Prepositions of time. Ask the class to retell the. Eg:. prepositions of time, the use of each She plays chess on Sunday one and make examples on the She plays chess in the evening board. At/ in/ on/ after/ before/ for,. Remark and correct. from...to , between ..and , during. At 6 o’clock, at christmas, at night.. On Sunday, on May 1st In the evening, in May, in 1990 After 6, before 6. 3. Modals: should, can could, may 6’. From 6 to 8, from morning to night... 3. Modals: should, can could, may Eg: Can you help me, please?.

(300) Ask the class to retell the modal. Could you do me a favor?. verbs Remark and correct. May I help you? You should work harder on your. 5’. 4. Adverbs of manner. Spanish pronunciation 4. Adverbs of manner. Ask the class to retell the use, form. soft softly careful carefully fast fast hard hard good well Eg: He plays soccer well She swims carefully. adverbs of manner Remark and correct. Listen and answer 5. Commands, requests and advice. 10’. 5. Commands, requests and advice in reported speech. in reported speech Eg: “ Open the door, please”, she said She asked me to open the door “ Please give Tom this book” she said She told me to give you this book S + asked/ told + O + to. Ask the class to retell the forms of. +V. not to. commands, requests and advice in. “ Nam should work harder on his. reported speech. speaking”, she said to me. of questions and how to answer. She said you should work harder. them. on your speaking. Remark and correct. -> S + said + S + should + V 6. Gerunds.

(301) 5’. 6. Gerunds. Listen and answer. Ask S to give examples. Eg: She likes playing soccer She is good at playing chess. Ask the class to retell the forms of. Her favorite activity is cooking.. gerunds. Learning English is difficult. Listen and answer. Remark and correct c. Feed back: 2’. - Summarizes the contents of the lesson. Ss: listen and copy d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures. + Redo all the exercises. + Prepare next lesson. Test lesson. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ............................................................................................................... Date of preparing:13 /11/ 2012. Period. 38. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /11/2012 /11/2012 /11/2012 /11/2012. TEST 45 MINUTES. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, the teacher will check ss’ vocabulary, grammar and knowledges from unit 4 to unit 6 + Vocabulary: review all vocabulary and structures from unit 4 to unit 6.

(302) + Structures: - Past simple tense, and present simple with future meaning - “used to” - Prepositions of time - Modals: should, can could, may - Adverbs of manner - Commands, requests and advice in reported speech - Gerunds b. Skills: speaking and writing. c. Education: SS learn hard. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: 1. Matrix of test Tên chủ đề. Nhận biết TNKQ. T. Thông hiểu TNLQ. TL. L Pronunciati. Choose the. on. word that. Vận dụng TN TL. Cộng. KQ 5 câu = 2đ. The. = 20 %. underlined part pronoun different. ( 5 cau = 2 ) Grammar. Unit 4,5,6. Unit 4, 5, 6. 13câu. and. ( multi choice). ( verb form). = 4đ. vocabulary. 8 câu x 0,25 = 2. 5 cau = 2d. 40 %. đ Reading. Unit 5 Study habits ( Answer the. 4câu =.

(303) questions. 2đ. 4 câu x 0,5) =. = 20%. 2d Writing. Unit 6 ( Complet e the letter with the. Tổng. word. 7 câu =. cued). 2đ. 7 cau = 2. 20 %. 5 câu = 2 đ. 8 câu = 2 đ. 9 câu = 4 d =. d 7 câu = 2. 29 c =. = 20 %. = 20 %. 40 %. đ. 10. = 20 %. =100%. WRITTEN TEST: 45 MINUTES Subject: English Name: .......................................................... class: 8A1 Mark The teacher’s remarks. I.. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 2 points). 1. A. smiled B. laughed C. ploughed 2. A. house B. head C. hundred 3. A. husband B. must C. useless 4. A sure B. sun C. success 5. A. beds B. doors C. students II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES:. D. stored D. hour D. industry D. sort D. plays. 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts) 1. When I was a child, I ..............follow my Mom to the market. A. used to B. like C. get used to D. usually 2. We must be there ..............7:30 and 10:30. A. at B. before C. between D. after th 3. They’ll arrive ..............Monday, July 14 . A. in B. at C. during D. on 4. I like folktale and ..............does my sister. A. neither B. so C. too D. either 5. They wanted to know ..............she left early. A. why B. what C. where D. when.

(304) 6. My father used ..............us to the zoo when he was alive. A. took B. take C. to take D. taking 7. Oh, that’s nice. Where .............. it? A. do you buy B. are you buy C. did you buy D. you buy 8. She asked her children ........................ A. to stop playing B. stop to play C. stop playing D. stopping to play 2. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: 2 points 1. Hoa enjoys ..................................( go) to West Lake Water Park on Sunday. 2. After .................................................( do) his homework, Nam usually................................. (listen) to music. 3. Can you .................................................( show) me the way to the zoo, please? 4. My father used to ........................................( smoke) five years ago. 5. Yesterday, Mrs Hoa .................................................( watch) TV. III. READING: Read the following passage, then answer the questions: 2 points “ Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart. Howerver, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to remember how to use the word in the right way. In order to remember words better, some learners even write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time. Many language learners do not try to learn all new words they come across. They usually underline or highlight only the words they want to learn. This helps them remember important words.” Answer the questions: 1. Do learners learn words in the same way? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why do some learners write example sentences with new words ? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What do some learners do in order to remember words better? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Why don’t some learners learn all the new words they come across?.

(305) ……………………………………………………………………………………… IV. Writing Complete the letter:(2.points) Dear Hoa, Thanks/your letter. I/pleased/hear/you/have/interesting Teacher’s day We/receive/first semester report/few days ago. I/get/good/grades/Math/ Physics/History/ but/English result/be/poor. English teacher/ask/me/ spend more time/it/so/I/study harder/next semester. Write/soon/and/tell/all your news. Regards, Lan. ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * Key: I. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 0,4 x 5 =2 points ) 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES: 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts). 1. A. 2 B. 3 D. 4 B. 5 A. 6 C. 7 C. 8 A. 2. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: ( 2 points) 1. Going 2. Doing – listen 3. Show 4. Smoke 5. Watched III. READING: 2points ( 0,4 x 5) 1. No, they don’t 2. Because they want to remember how to use the word in the right way. 3. They write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time 4. Because they only want to learn important words. IV. WRITING: 2 points: Dear Hoa,.

(306) Thanks for your letter. I am pleased to hear you had an interesting Teacher’s Day. We received our first semester report a few days ago. I got good grades for Math Physics and History, but my English result was poor. My English teacher asked me to spend more time on it so I must study harder next semester. Write soon and tell me all your news Regards, Lan. WRITTEN TEST: 45 MINUTES Subject: English Name: .......................................................... class: 8A2 Mark The teacher’s remarks. II.. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 2 points). 6. A. smiled B. started C. ploughed 7. A. house B. head C. hundred 8. A. husband B. must C. useless 9. A sure B. sun C. success 10.A. doors B. boys C. books II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES:. D. stored D. hour D. industry D. sort D. windows. 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts) 1. It’s too cold outside. _____ you close the door, please? a. Do b. Are c. Could d. Why don’t 2. She is studying hard _____ pass the final exams. a. for b. in order to c. so to d. so that 3. Nam hates _____ to the market. a. to go b. goes c. go d. going 4. It is really interesting, _____ ? a. does it b. isn’t it c. doesn’t it d. is it 5. Mary was born in France. French is her _____. a. mother tongue b. first language c. foreign language d. a & b 6. John came ____ an old school friend in the street this morning. a. with b. along c. across d. off 7. She advised me _____ late. a. not b. not to be c. not be d. not being 8. He does morning exercises regularly _____ improve his health. a. in order for b. so as to c. so that d. b & c 2. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: 2 points 1. Hoa often ..................................( go) to West Lake Water Park on Sunday..

(307) 2. After .................................................( do) his homework, Nam usually................................. (listen) to music. 3. Can you .................................................( help) me carry this bag, please? 4. They used to ........................................( walk) to work five years ago. 5. Yesterday, Mrs Hoa .................................................( read) comics. III. READING: Read the following passage, then answer the questions: 2 points “ Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart. Howerver, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to remember how to use the word in the right way. In order to remember words better, some learners even write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time. Many language learners do not try to learn all new words they come across. They usually underline or highlight only the words they want to learn. This helps them remember important words.” Answer the questions: 1. Do learners learn words in the same way? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why do some learners write example sentences with new words ? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What do some learners do in order to remember words better? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Why don’t some learners learn all the new words they come across? ……………………………………………………………………………………… IV. Writing Complete the letter:(2.points) Dear Hoa, Thanks/your letter. I/pleased/hear/you/have/interesting Teacher’s day We/receive/first semester report/few days ago. I/get/good/grades/Math/ Physics/History/ but/English result/be/poor. English teacher/ask/me/ spend more time/it/so/I/study harder/next semester. Write/soon/and/tell/all your news..

(308) Regards, Lan. ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * Key: I. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 0,4 x 5 =2 points ) 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES: 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts). 1. C. 2 B. 3 D. 4 B. 5 D. 6 C. 7 B. 8 B. 2.Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: ( 2 points) 1. Goes 2. Doing – listens 3. Help 4. Walk 5. read III. READING: 2points ( 0,4 x 5) 1.No, they don’t 2. Because they want to remember how to use the word in the right way. 3.They write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time 4.Because they only want to learn important words. IV. WRITING: 2 points: Dear Hoa, Thanks for your letter. I am pleased to hear you had an interesting Teacher’s Day. We received our first semester report a few days ago. I got good grades for Math Physics and History, but my English result was poor. My English teacher asked me to spend more time on it so I must study harder next semester. Write soon and tell me all your news Regards, Lan. WRITTEN TEST: 45 MINUTES Subject: English.

(309) Name: .......................................................... class: 8A3 Mark The teacher’s remarks. III.. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 2 points). 1.A. walked B. laughed C. ploughed missed 2.A. house B. head C. hour 3. A. husband B. must C. useless 4.A sure B. sun C. success 5. A. beds B. doors C. rulers II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES:. D. D. horse D. industry D. sort D. cooks. 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts) 1 She asked her children _____. a. to stop playing b. stop to play c. stop playing d. stopping to play 2. People _____ think that the world was flat. a. get used to b. didn’t use to c. used to d. are used to 3. His parents are always proud _____ him. a. about b. of c. on d. with 4. I know you work really _____ this semester. a. hardly b. good c. bad d. hard 5. They wanted to know ..............she left early. A. why B. what C. where D. when 6. My father used ..............us to the zoo when he was alive. A. took B. take C. to take D. taking 7. Oh, that’s nice. Where .............. it? A. do you buy B. are you buy C. did you buy D. you buy 8. She asked her children ........................ A. to stop playing B. stop to play C. stop playing D. stopping to play 2. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: 2 points 1. They sometimes ................................( go) to West Lake Water Park on Sunday. 2. After .................................................( do) his homework, Nam usually................................. (listen) to music. 3. You should .................................................( improve) your English 4. My father used to ........................................( live) on a farm when he was small. 5. Yesterday, Mrs Hoa .................................................( play) badminton. III. READING: Read the following passage, then answer the questions: 2 points.

(310) “ Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart. Howerver, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to remember how to use the word in the right way. In order to remember words better, some learners even write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time. Many language learners do not try to learn all new words they come across. They usually underline or highlight only the words they want to learn. This helps them remember important words.” Answer the questions: 1. Do learners learn words in the same way? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why do some learners write example sentences with new words ? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What do some learners do in order to remember words better? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Why don’t some learners learn all the new words they come across? ……………………………………………………………………………………… IV. Writing Complete the letter:(2.points) Dear Hoa, Thanks/your letter. I/pleased/hear/you/have/interesting Teacher’s day We/receive/first semester report/few days ago. I/get/good/grades/Math/ Physics/History/ but/English result/be/poor. English teacher/ask/me/ spend more time/it/so/I/study harder/next semester. Write/soon/and/tell/all your news. Regards, Lan. ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * Key:.

(311) I. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 0,4 x 5 =2 points ) 1. C 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. D II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES: 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts). 1. A. 2 C. 3 B. 4 D. 5 A. 6 C. 7 C. 8 A. 2.Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: ( 2 points) 1.go 2.Doing – listen 3,improve 4.live 5.played III. READING: 2points ( 0,4 x 5) 1.No, they don’t 2. Because they want to remember how to use the word in the right way. 3.They write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time 4.Because they only want to learn important words. IV. WRITING: 2 points: Dear Hoa, Thanks for your letter. I am pleased to hear you had an interesting Teacher’s Day. We received our first semester report a few days ago. I got good grades for Math Physics and History, but my English result was poor. My English teacher asked me to spend more time on it so I must study harder next semester. Write soon and tell me all your news Regards, Lan. WRITTEN TEST: 45 MINUTES Subject: English Name: .......................................................... class: 8A4 Mark The teacher’s remarks. I.. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 2 points) 1.A. smiled 2.A. house. B. laughed B. head. C. ploughed C. hundred. D. stored D. hour.

(312) 3.A. husband B. must C. useless 4.A sure B. sun C. success 5.A. beds B. doors C. students II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES:. D. industry D. sort D. plays. 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts) 1. When I was a child, I ..............follow my Mom to the market. A. used to B. like C. get used to D. usually 2. We must be there ..............7:30 and 10:30. A. at B. before C. between D. after th 3. They’ll arrive ..............Monday, July 14 . A. in B. at C. during D. on 4. I like folktale and ..............does my sister. A. neither B. so C. too D. either 5. They wanted to know ..............she left early. A. why B. what C. where D. when 6. My father used ..............us to the zoo when he was alive. A. took B. take C. to take D. taking 7. Oh, that’s nice. Where .............. it? A. do you buy B. are you buy C. did you buy D. you buy 8. She asked her children ........................ A. to stop playing B. stop to play C. stop playing D. stopping to play 2. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: 2 points 1. Hoa enjoys ..................................( go) to West Lake Water Park on Sunday. 2. After .................................................( do) his homework, Nam usually................................. (listen) to music. 3. Can you .................................................( show) me the way to the zoo, please? 4. My father used to ........................................( smoke) five years ago. 5. Yesterday, Mrs Hoa .................................................( watch) TV. III. READING: Read the following passage, then answer the questions: 2 points “ Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart. Howerver, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to remember how to use the word in the right way. In order to remember words better, some learners even write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time..

(313) Many language learners do not try to learn all new words they come across. They usually underline or highlight only the words they want to learn. This helps them remember important words.” Answer the questions: 1. Do learners learn words in the same way? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why do some learners write example sentences with new words ? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What do some learners do in order to remember words better? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Why don’t some learners learn all the new words they come across? ……………………………………………………………………………………… IV. Writing Complete the letter:(2.points) Dear Hoa, Thanks/your letter. I/pleased/hear/you/have/interesting Teacher’s day We/receive/first semester report/few days ago. I/get/good/grades/Math/ Physics/History/ but/English result/be/poor. English teacher/ask/me/ spend more time/it/so/I/study harder/next semester. Write/soon/and/tell/all your news. Regards, Lan. ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... * Key: I. PRONUNCIATION: Choose the word whose part underlined is pronounced differently from the others in each group. ( 0,4 x 5 =2 points ) 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C II.VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR STRUCTURES:.

(314) 1. Circle the answer A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence (2 pts). 1. A. 2 B. 3 D. 4 B. 5 A. 6 C. 7 C. 8 A. 3. Complete the sentences with correct verb forms: ( 2 points) 6. Going 7. Doing – listen 8. Show 9. Smoke 10.Watched III. READING: 2points ( 0,4 x 5) 5. No, they don’t 6. Because they want to remember how to use the word in the right way. 7. They write each word and its use on a small piece of paper and stick it somewhere in their house so as to learn it at any time 8. Because they only want to learn important words. IV. WRITING: 2 points: Dear Hoa, Thanks for your letter. I am pleased to hear you had an interesting Teacher’s Day. We received our first semester report a few days ago. I got good grades for Math Physics and History, but my English result was poor. My English teacher asked me to spend more time on it so I must study harder next semester. Write soon and tell me all your news Regards, Lan. Date of preparing:. Period. / 2012. 39. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD. LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read a dialogue to know how Nam’s neighborhood is - Standard: Practice the dialogue and complete the sentences - Higher: Ask and answer more questions about the dilogue + Vocabulary: since(prep) ; area(n); serve (v); tasty(a) ; pancake(n); try(v) + Structures : - Past simple tense.

(315) - Present perfect with “since ” and “for” - Comparision with: like, (not) as…as, (not) the same as, different from… b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: SS love your neighborhood. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 2’ Where do you live? What is there in your neighborhood? Introduces the lesson: To talk about things in your neighborhood we will study inthis lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 5’. Teacher’s actions 1. Getting Stated. : - Explains the asking of the matching. - Lets Ss do the matching. - Explains the cue words and gives out the answers. - Lets Ss read clearly the cuawords. - Lets Ss practice talking about places in their neighborhood.. Students’ actions 1.Things in your neighborhood: - Listen carefully. - Do the matching. - Listen and copy down. The answers : a. Grocery store. b. Stadium. c. Wet market. d. Drugstore. e. Hairdresser’s. f. Swimming pool. - Listen and read. - Practice with a partner. Example Exchanges : A : What’s this ? B : It’s a stadium. A :Is there a stadium in your neighborhood?.

(316) 10’. - Remarks.. B : Yes/No....etc.. 2. Listen and read : * Presentation: - Introduces the situation of the dialogue between Nam and Na. - Teaches the new words in the lesson. - explain. - explain. - Lets Ss practice reading and play the game “Rub out and remember” with the new words. - Remarks. - Introduces the structures in the lesson through the situation in the dialogue.. - Listen and remember - Listen and copy down. 1. New words. - To serve (v) - A pancake (n) - Practice and play the game. - Listen - Listen and copy down. 2. The Present Perfect Tense : ( +) Positive : S + have/has + P2 ( -) Negative : S + have/has + not + P2 ( ?) Yes-No question : Have/Has + S + P2 ? + Yes, S + have/has. - No , S + have/has + not. - Listen and remember. + Since : a point of time. + For : a period of time.. - Lets Ss notice the usage of “since” and “for” in the present perfect - Make the examples . tense. - Listen and remember. - Asks Ss to make some example to explain. - Remarks. 15’. * Practice : - Lets Ss listen to the tape. - Lets Ss listen again and repeat in chorus. - Lets Ss play the roles and practice reading the dialogue with a partner. - Calls some pairs to practice in front. - Listens and remarks. - Explains and lets Ss do Ex 2 (P. 64). - Listen carefully. - Listen and repeat. - Play the roles and practice reading. - Practice in front. - Listen and remember. - Listen and do the exercise in groups. - Give out the answers. - Listen and copy down. 3. The answers : a. new..

(317) - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front. - Remarks. 5’. 3. Production : - Repeats the structure in the lesson. - Explains the asking and lets Ss do Ex 1,2 (P.44) in the workbook. - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front of the class. - Listens and checks.. - Lets Ss read clearly the sentences in Ex 2 in front. b. lastweek. c. tired. d. restaurant. e. Hue. f. pancakes. - Listen and remember. - Listen and do the exercises. - Give out the answers. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 1 : studied seen attended been played done lived found written read * Exercise 2 : a. since e. since b. since f. for c. for g. for d. for h. since - Read clearly.. c. Feed back: 2’ (?) Does Nam know the area very well ? How long has he lived there ? Does Na know the are very well ? Why not ? How does Na’s mother feel ? Ss: Answer. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures. Make sentences with the structures + Do exercises 1,2,3 in the work book + Prepare next lesson. Unit 7 speak + listen. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: ...............................................................................................................

(318) Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. Period. / 2012. 40. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD. LESSON 2: SPEAK + LISTEN 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel - Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box - Standard : Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box - Higher:. Ask some more questions about the dialogue. + Vocabulary: parcel(n); surface mail(n); airmail(n); contest(n); ground(n); photographer(n); channel( n); match(n); exhibition(n). + Structures: I want to send this parcel to Quy Nhon How much is airmail? What’s on this week? b. Skills: + Speaking: Ask and answer about the price of sending a letter, a postcard or a parcel + Listening: Listen to the dialogue and fill in the advertisement a phrase from the box c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard and be polite at the post office 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson:.

(319) a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson: Time Teacher’s actions 7’ *. Pre – speaking :. Students’ actions I. Speaking:. - Introduces the situation of the. - Listen carefully.. speaking through the dialogue. - Listen and copy down.. between the clerk and Mrs Kim.. * New words:. - Teaches the newwords in the. Parcel (n): bưu phẩm. lesson.. Airmail (n): thư, bưu phẩm gửi bằng. - Lets Ss practice reading the. đường hàng không. newwords.. Surface mail (n): Thư, bưu phẩm gửi. - Remarks.. bằng đường bộ, thủy.. - Explains the structures in the. Item (n): vật phẩm. lesson.. Weigh (v): cân. - Asks Ss to make some examples. Weight (n): trọng lượng. to explain.. Charge (n): Cước phí. - Remarks. - Lets Ss practice reading the dialogue with a partner. - Calls some pairs to practice in front. - Remarks. 7’. *. While – speaking : - Gives out and explains the brochure and the information in the box in Ex 2 (P. 65). - Lets Ss to make similar dialogues using the prompts in the box.. - Calls some pairs to practice in. - Practice reading. - Listen and remember. - Listen and copy down. 1. I want to send this parcel to Quy Nhon. 2. How much is this/are they ? It’s/They’re........ - Make some examples to explain. - Listen and remember. - Practice reading the dialogue. - Practice in front. - Listen and remember..

(320) 6’. front.. - Listen and remember.. - Remarks.. - Make similar dialogues with a. *. Post – speaking :. partner.. - Lets Ss make open dialogues using Example Exchanges :. 6’. 6’. the structures in the lesson and the. You :I want to send this letter to. teacher cue-words or free. Kon Tum. dialogues... Clerk : Do you want to send it. Cue-words :. airmail or surfacemail ?. + Postcard / Son La.. You:Surfacemail, please.How much. + Surfacemail / 50g.. is it ?. - Calls some pairs to practice in. Clerk : Let me weigh the letter. Yes,. front of the class.. 20g. That’ll be 800 dong.. - Remarks.. You :Here you are.. *. Pre - listening :. Clerk : Thank you.. - Introduces the situation of the. - Practice in front.. listening through the advertisement. - Listen and remember.. in the textbook.. - Make their own dialogues using. - Teaches the newwords in the. the teacher’s cue-words.. lesson.. - Practice in front.. - Explains the structures in the. -Listen and copy down.. lesson .. 2. Listening:. - Makes some examples to explain. A photographer (n). - Explains the information in the. A contest (n). advertisement.. A fan (n). - Lets Ss read and predict to. - Listen and remember.. complete the advertisement.. - Listen and copy down. *. While - listening :. - Listen carefully.. - Lets Ss listen to the tape.. - Read and predict the information.. - Lets Ss listen again to check their. - Listen carefully.. predictions.. - Listen and check..

(321) 6’. - Lets Ss share and compare the. - Share and compare the answers .. answers with a partner.. - Listen again and check.. - Lets Ss listen again to check.. - Give out the answers in front.. - Calls Ss to give out the answers in. - Listen and copy down.. front.. * Exercise 1 (P.65,66):. - Corrects the mistakes.. 1. The newcomer.. - Lets Ss listen all the tape again.. 2. Town Ground. - Lets Ss listen and do Exercise 2. 3. English Speaking Contest. (P.66). 4. Culture House. - Calls some Ss to givre out the. - Listen carefully.. answers in front.. - Listen and do the exercise.. - Remarks and gives out the. - Give out the answes. answers.. - Listen and copy down.. *. Post - listening :. * Exercise 2 (P.66) :. - Repeats the topic of the lesson... a. T. b.F. c. F. - Lets Ss play the game “ Find SO. d. T. e. F. f. NI. who” with activities on the. - Listen and remember.. weekend.. - Play the game.. - Remarks.. What to do Go to the movie. Who Hoa. theater ?. Nam. Listen to music ? ...etc - Listen and check. - Listen and remember. c. Feed back: 2’ T: Calls on a Ss to put the sentences below in the correct order to make a meaningful dialogue. - Can I help you ? - Do you want to send it surface mail or airmail ? - How much is surface mail ?.

(322) - Yes. I want to send this postcard to HCM city. - It’s 1,500 d. - What about airmail ? - It’s much quicker, but of course more expensive. - How much ? - It’s 2000 d. - I’ll send it airmail. - All right. Ss: Do as T says. T: Gives comments and compliments. Then shows them the answer key and summarizes the main languages of the lesson orally once again. d. Home work: 2’ - Learn the new words and the new structures by heart - Make questions and answers about part “Speak” - Do exercises 4,5,6 in the work book. - Prepare for the next lesson “ Read ” REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. Period. / 2012. 41. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD LESSON 3: READ. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to read and understand the text about opening a new shopping mall.

(323) - Standard: Read and tick the True or False sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions (exercise 2) - Higher : Write a summary of the text + Vocabulary: mall (n); different (a); roof (n) ; notice (v); owner (n); business (n); selection (n); concerned (a) ; resident (n); offer(v); goods(n) = product(n). + Structures: Present perfect, future simple b. Skills: Reading-comprehension: Read and check the sentences (exercise 1) and answer the questions (exercise 2) c. Education: Educate ss to learn hard, love the beauty and kindness 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Question: - Write new word on the board? - 2 students do exercise 2 in page 65. * Answers: + Neighborhood (n) hang xom - A wet market (n) cho ca - To weigh (v) can nang - A parcel (n) buu kien + You :I want to send this letter to Kon Tum Clerk : Do you want to send it airmail or surfacemail ? You:Surfacemail, please.How much is it ? Clerk : Let me weigh the letter. Yes, 20g. That’ll be 800 dong. You :Here you are. Clerk : Thank you. * Mark:. + 5 x 2 = 10 + speak correctly and fluently = 10..

(324) * Introduction + Do you like shopping ? + Where do you often go shopping ? + What can you buy there ? + Have got any stores near your house? + Is it big or small? T: we will study this lesson about mall b. The new lesson: Time 10’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre – reading : - Introduces the topic of the lesson through the advertisement(P.67). - Teaches the new words in the lesson. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - explain. - Lets Ss practice reading and play the game “ Slap the board” with the newwords. - Remarks. - Lets Ss repeats the present perfect tense. - Ask some Ss to make some examples . - Introduces the structures in the lesson : Making comparisons.. 15’. Students’ actions Listen carefully. - Listen and copy down. 1. New words - A mall (n) sieu thi nho - Humid (adj) am uot - Residents (n) nguoi dan - Discount (n) - To offer (v) de nghi - To concern (v) lien quan - Practice and play the game. - Listen and rememner. - Repeat the structure. - Make the examples. - Listen and copy down. 2. Structure. + Be different from ... khac voi cai gi + Be (not) the same as ... giong nhu cai gi - Listen and predict.. - Explains the asking of Ex1 (P.68) and lets Ss predict the answers. 2. While – reading : - Lets Ss listen to the passage.. - Listen carefully. - Read and check.

(325) - Lets Ss read the passage and check their predictions. - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front. - Remarks and gives out the answers.. - Read and do the exercise.. - Calls some Ss to read clearly the passage in front. - Remarks 3. Post – reading : - Lets Ss do the role play and discuss about the situation with the new mall in the neighborhood.. - Listen and remember.. - Listen and copy down 3. Exercise1 (P.68) : a. F ( It’s open daily) b. F (There are 50 stores) c. F (Not everyone is pleased ...) d,e. T - Read the passage and answer the questions - Practice in front. - Lets Ss read the passage again and - Listen and copy down. answer the questions in Ex2 (P.68). 4. Exercise 2 (P.68). - Calls some pairs to practice in a. It’s very different from ... and front. won’t notice the weather. - Remarks. b. In the shopping mall, there are 50 air-conditioned special stores,4 movie theaters 10 restaurants and a children’s play area. c. They think it’ll take their business. d. The stores in the mall offer a wider selection of products, some kinds of goods are at cheaper prices. - Read clearly. 10’. advantages. disadvantages. + we can shop everyday + shop in comfortable and don't notice about the weather + there are 50 stores. 4 movie theater 10 restaurants children .... + goods are cheaper. - We can't buy goods earlier / before 8a.m - don't know how to choose good thing - spend much time to find the place .........

(326) c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart all the newwords. + Read and translate the passage. + Prepare next lesson : Unit 7 : Write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. Period. / 2012. 42. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD LESSON 4: WRITE. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims:By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to write a class notice using a pasage and the model notice - Standard: write a class notice using a pasage and the model story - Higher: Ask and answer the questions about the notice + Vocabulary: discuss (v); effect(n); hardware store(n); contact(v); holdv) = organize(v); ; celebrate(v); hall(n); notice(n); contest(n) = competition(n) + Structures: Format of a notice b. Skills: Writing skills: guided writing skills using a pasage and the model notice - Speaking skills: ask and answer about the notice c. Education: SS love your neighborhood..

(327) 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson: Time 10’. 15’. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre – writing : - Introduces the situation of the notice. - Teaches the new words in the lesson. - explain. - explain. - explain. - Lets Ss practice reading the new words. - Remarks. - Lets Ss read the notice and answer the question. * Question : a. Who holds the meeting ? b. What do they hold the meeting for ? c. When is the meeting? d. Where is the meeting ? e. Who can they contact for more information ? - Remarks. Students’ actions - Listen carefully. - Listen and copy down. 1. New words. - An effect (n ) - To effect (v ) - To contact (v ) - Practice reading. - Listen and remember. - Read and predict the answers. The answers : a. T.P St Residents and store owners. b. To discuss effects of new mall. c. At 8p.m on May 20. d. At Binh’s Hardware, 12 Hang Da St e. Pham Van Tai. - Listen and check. - Share and compare.. 2. While – writing : - Lets Ss read the notice and explain Nga’s. - Lets Ss share and compare the answers with . - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front. - Corrects the mistakes with the. - Give out the answers. - Listen and copy down. Example The school English Speak Club HOLDING A SPEAKING CONTEST TO CELEBRATE THE.

(328) whole class.. 15’. TEACHER’S DAY. Date : November 15. Time : 7.30 p.m to 10 p.m Place :Hall 204, building G. - Read clearly.. - Calls a student to read clearly the notice in front of the class. - Remarks. 3. Post – writing : - Explains the asking of Ex 3. - Lets Ss do the exercises in groups. - Calls some groups to give out their writing in front. - Remarks . - Gives out the example (if necessary).. - Listen and remember. - Listen and remember. - Do the exercise. - Give out the answers. - Listen and remember. - Copy down. Example: The school sport club of class 8a. HOLDING A BADMINTON TOUR NAMENT. Date : December 20. Time : from 2pm to 4pm. Place : At school sport ground Please contact .... the monitor of class 8a for more information. - Listen and remember... - Listen and correct their mistake. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. How to write a notice. d. Home work: 2’ Guides Ss to : + Complete the notice. + Learn by heart the structures. + Do exercises in the work book. + Prerare next lesson : Unit 7 : Language focus. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. / 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1:. /2012.

(329) Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4: Period. 43. /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 7: MY NEIGHBORHOOD. LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will have a good chance to review: - Present perfect with “since” and “for” - Comparision with: like…, (not) as…as…, (not) the same as…, different from… - Standard: Write the past participle form of the regular and irregular verbs Complete the expressions using “since” or “for” Complete the sentences using the form of the verbs in present perfect tense Complete the conversations using the verb in the box Complete the sentences using the form of the adjectives in the box - Higher : Ask and answer some morre questions + Vocabulary: attend(v); company(n); through(prep); pocket-watch(n); wristwatch(n) + Structures: Past participle form of the irregular verbs Comparision with: like…, (not) as…as…, (not) the same as…, different from… b. Skills: All four skills c. Education: SS love your neighborhood. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Go to the board and write down the verbforms I,II, III in individually. Present. Past. P-Participle.

(330) Be ……….. ………….. …….. Went …………. Eat ……….. ………….. …….. ……….. Lived …….. Attended ………….. See ………. ………….. ……… ………. Written ……... Did ………….. ……… Work ………….. collect ………. …………… * Key: be → was/were → been go → went → gone eat → eat → eaten live → lived → lived attend → attended → attended see → saw → seen do → did → done write → wrote → written work → worked → worked collect → collected → collected. * Warm up: 1’ To review the grammar we will study in this lesson. b. The new lesson: Time 17’. Teacher’s actions 1. Language Focus : * Activity 1 : - Lets Ss repeat the usages and the meaning of the present perfect tense. - Asks Ss to make some examples to explain. - Lets Ss repeat the use of “since” and “for”. - Explains the asking and lets Ss do Ex 2 (P.69). - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front. - Listens and checks.. Students’ actions I . The Present Perfect Tense : - Listen and repeat. S + have/has +(not) + P.P. - Make some examples to explain. - Listen and copy down. - Listen carefully and do the exercise. - Listen and give out the answers. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 2(P.69). a. for e. for b. since f. for c. since g. since d. since h. for - Listen and remember..

(331) - Listen and do the exercise. - Explains the asking of Ex 3 (P.69). - Lets Ss do the exercise by playing the game “ Lucky Numbers”. The answers : 1. e 5. f 2. Lucky Number 6. c 3. Lucky Number 7. b 4. d 8. Lucky Number - Remarks. - Introduces the situation of the dialogue in Ex 4 (P.70). - Lets Ss read and explain the asking of the exercise - Lets Ss read and explain the meaning of the verbs in the box. - Remarks and lets Ss do the exercise. - Calls some pairs to give out the answers in front. - Checks the mistakes. 10’. * Activity 2 : - Lets Ss repeat the structures to make equal comparison in Unit 7. - Lets Ss make some examples to explain. - Remarks. - Lets Ss read and explain the asking of Ex 5 (p.70,71). - Lets Ss do the exercise. - Calls some Ss to give out the answers in front. - Remarks.. * Exercise 3 (P.69): b. have’t eaten c. have’t seen d. have attented e. has worked f. has collected - Listen and copy down. - Listen and remember. - Read and explain clearly. - Read and explain. - Listen and do the exercise. - Practice in front. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 4 (P.70): 1. have been 5. want 2. hope 6. looks 3. have...lived 7. have...been 4. is 8. have II. Comparison : - Listen and repeat. 1. S + be + different from + O. 2. S + be (not)+ the same + (N) +as + O. 3. S + V + as/so + Adj/Adv + as + O. - Make the examples. - Listen and copy down. - Read and explain clearly. - Do the exercises. - Give out the answers. - Listen and copy down. * Exercise 5 (P.70,71): c. not so cheap as. d. the same as e. as expensive as f. different from.

(332) g. as long as h. not so modern as i. not so cheap as. 12’. 2. Production : - Repeats the structures and lets Ss do some exercises in the workbook : - Repeat and do the exercises. + Ex 5 (P.46) * Exercise 6 (P.46): + Ex 7 (P.47,48) a. started b. have known c. did – meet d. haven’t seen e. has been f. went g. moved h. have lived. i. has had j. bought - Listen and correct their mistake. k. has been. - Listen and check. c. Feed back: 2’. resay the content of the lesson. The present perfect with since and for. Comparison. d. Home work: 2’ - Guides Ss to : + Learn by heart the structures. + Redo all the exercises. + Prepare next lesson. Unit 8 : Getting Started + Listen and read REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. Period. 44. / 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE. LESSON 1: GETTING STARTED + LISTEN AND READ 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills: All four skills.

(333) c. Education: SS love your neighborhood. 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson: Time 5’. Teacher’s actions I. Warm-up : Make some qs to sts.. Students’ actions 1. The differences between the country and the city:. ?. Where do you live ?. ?. Have you been to the country / city. Life. ?. What do you think of the life in the. /country - beautiful. - noisy ,. views. expensive. - fresh air. - talk buidings. - friendly. - kinds of goods. - fresh food. - entertainment. - small houses. - traffic jam .... country ? in the city ? ( look at part getting started ) ?. 10’ ? ? ?. Where do you like to live ? Why ?. Life / city. II. Presentation.. - cheap 2. Life in the country. Look at the picture on page 72. country. What is it about ?. today. Is it in the past or today ? Is it. Life, goods, people ..... changing ? about what ?. * New words:. Present some more new words to sts. Explain Explain. 1. peaceful ( adj ) thanh bình 2. permanently : vĩnh viễn , mãi ( to ) change(v) thay đổi accessible (adj) có thể được sử.

(334) Explain. dụng 6. definitely(adv) rõ ràng. Explain. 7. facility ( n ) : cơ sở vật chất. Explain. 8. not only ... but also = both .... Explain. and. T read and ask SS to repeat. Ex : She is not only beautiful but. Make new sentences with each. also intelligent. words.. She is both beautiful and intelligent.. ?. *The life in the country is getting What do you think of the life in the. better. country today ?. The weather is getting colder. S + be + getting/ becoming. ? How to form and use ? ? ?. Do you remember Na ?. ?. Where does she come from ?. + comparative adj * Saying about changing now(in future). What does she think of the country now ? Hoa and Na are talking about the country life today. What they think of the life in there we will discover 17’. in this part. III. Practice. Read the dialogue and tell to class 5 things. * entertainment, foods,goods,houses,people... ?. Read it again and tell me. What do Hoa and Na think of the life in the country ?. + beautiful, quiet and peacefull place ( the countryside in peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do.) (There are no libraries , no movie theater .... to go).

(335) + Many remote areas are getting ?. electriccity. People can now have What about you ?. things like refrigerator ..... Read the dialogue in pairs.. + life is changing better.. Some pairs read aloud.. + life is simple, people are friendly. Read it again and answer the qs in. and the air is clean.. pairs. ?. Some pairs talk aloud.. * Answer the questions:. ?. Where has Na been ?. a.Na has been to the countryside.. ?. When was she there ?. b. She was there for the weekend.. What is her opinion of the country ?. c.The countryside is peaceful and. ? ? 8’. quiet and there is nothing to do. What does "The is nothing to do ". d.There are no librarries, no. mean ?. movies…. What are some of the change that. e. Many remote areas are getting. Hoa mentions ?. electricity. People can now have. IV. Production.. things like : TV, refrigerator….. Sts discuss and anser the qs.. 3. What do you think of the country? Do you prefer the city or the country ? Why (not)? .............. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson.The differences between the countryand city. The changes in the country now. d. Home work: 2’ - Learn all new words - Practise the dialogue again. - Do ex 1,2 in the workbook. - Prepare the next lesson: speak + Listen REMARKS:.

(336) Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: .............................................................................................................. Date of preparing:. Period. 45. / 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE LESSON 2: SPEAK + LISTEN. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: + The aims: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside - Listen to a conversation on the phone and fill in the missing words - Standard : Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside Listen to a conversation on the phone and fill in the missing words - Higher:. Ask and answer the questions about the changes of their countryside. + Vocabulary: busy(a); dirty(a); offer(v); get(v) = become(v). + Structures: Present progressive and comparative adjectives b. Skills: + Speaking: Ask and answer the questions about the changes of the countryside + Listening: Listen to the conversation and fill in the missing words c. Education: SS love their homeland 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: omit * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson:. Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions.

(337) 7’. *Pre- speaking. I. Speaking:. Introduce the aim through the table. 1. New words. Ask ss to look at the models and the busy(a) suggested answers in the table. dirty(a) offer(v) get(v) = become(v). Repeat the new words in chorus Listen and check Correct by themselves. Ask ss to repeat the new words in chorus. 2. Structures. Ask 2 ss to read. S + is / are + getting / becoming+. Remark and correct the mistake. adj(er) + …. Present the new structures to talk. more + adj There are more + adj + N(s) + …. about the changes Repeat the new structures in chorus Listen and check Correct by themselves Ask ss to repeat the new structures in chorus Ask 2 ss to read. Pairwork. Remark and correct the mistake *While-speaking(15’) Ask ss work in pairs to make. Observe, listen and remark. sentences using the two pictures. * Key:. Ask 6 pairs to practice. - The traffic is getting busier. Remark and give out the correct. - The town is becoming more. answers. beautiful.

(338) - The streets are becoming larger/ noisier/cleaner - There are more tall buildings and houses - There are more green trees II. Listening: * Pre-listening (5’). Observe and listen carefully. Hang the extra board and present the situation: Aunt Hang is calling Lan fro Hue to announce her that she and Uncle Chi are going to visit her family next week. Now listen to the phone conversation and complete it by filling in the missing words. Listen carefully. *While-listening (8’). Share and compare. Play the tape ( 3 times) Observe and correct Ask ss to give out their answers. 3. Listen. Ask others to remark. * Key:. Remark and give out the correct. 1) that. answers. 2) this 3) It’s 4) Where 5) from 6) coming 7) week 8) arriving 9) Thursday 10) late 11) afternoon.

(339) 12) speak 13) my 14) get * Post-listening (2’). Show out their ideas. Ask ss to make five sentences about the changes of their countryside c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. The change in the town. The vocabulary and structure. d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart vocabulary and structures. Write a paragraph about the changes in your hometown. Do exercises 5,6 in the work book. Prepare part read. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ..................................................................................................................... Date of preparing:. Period. 46. / 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE LESSON 3: READ. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills: c. Education: SS love their homeland 2. Preparation:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012.

(340) a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ Talk about the chang in your home town. 1 S answer: Ex: The buildings are getting taller. The streets are becoming more beautiful...... * Warm up: 2’ Jumbled words - Write the words with disordered letters on the board . + Fulentipl. ->. plentiful. + taneru. ->. nature. + loofd. ->. flood. + roestdy. ->. destroy. + viroped. ->. provide. + suertl. ->. result. + ciliestial. ->. facilities. - Ask them to write the correct words on the board and repeat chorally , individually b. The new lesson:. Time 10’. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. 1. Pre-reading. - Explain words and ask sts to give. - Write words on the board and read. the meanings.. aloud. - Explain the use of words. - explain.. 1. Newwords.. - explain.. - struggle (n) cuoc dau tranh.. - explain.. - typhoon (n) tran bao lon.. - explain.. - flood (n) lu lut.. - explain.. - drought (n) han han ..

(341) 15’. - explain.. - strain (n) su qua tai.= presure. - explain.. - tragedy (n) bi kich.. - Ask sts to read after.. - government (n).chinh phu. - Call sts to repeat.. - Ss try to listen to the teacher and. - Correct the pronunciation.. read after.. 2. While-reading.. 2. Practise reading.. - Make qs: ? Do you think many people move. -Yes/No.. to live in the city? ? Why do they want to move to the. - Good jobs,get more money,better. city ?. facilities.. ? What problems may arise when so - over crowded many people move to the city?. - population increase. - strain on social services .. - Read once aloud and ask sts to read in silence. - Call some ss read aloud before the a. Complete the summary. class.. * Answers.. - T listen and correct their mistake.. 1 - leaving. 6 - problems. - Guide sts how to complete the. 2 - home. 7 - schools. summary.. 3 - city. 8 - hospitals. - Let them do in a few mins.. 4 - rural. 9 - problem. - Call sts to write the answers on the 5 - city. 10 - world. board.. b. Finds words as the same. - Correct the mistakes and ask them. meanings.. to copy.. * Answers. a - rural. - Let sts read the explained. b - plentiful. meanings and find words as the. c - increase.

(342) same meanings.. d - strain. - Let sts discuss in groups. e - tragedy. - Call one of each group to write the f - urban. answers on the board. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to 10’. copy.. * Suggested answers :. 3. Post - reading. - build streets , theaters , stadiums in the countryside. Discussion - Give a situation : If you were a. - build schools , hospitals. Minister , what would you do for. - provide clean water , electricity ,. farmers ?. facilities. - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss. - build factory .. - Call on 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas before the class .. - Call some ss give the answers. - T give the right answer c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. The reason why many people move to the city. Vocabulary and structure d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart vocabulary. Read the text and translate. Do exercises 7,8 in the work book. Prepare part write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ......................................................................................................................

(343) Date of preparing:. Period. 47. / 2012. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE LESSON 4: WRITE. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills: c. Education: SS love their homeland 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson:. Time 10. 15. Teacher’s actions 1. Pre-writing. - Guide sts how to arrange the letter - Let sts discuss in groups. - Call one of each group to write the answers on the board. G1 G2 G3 G4 …………………………………… ……………………………………. - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy. 2. While-writing.. Students’ actions Ss try to listen to the teacher. - Do in group. 1. Parts of an informal letter. * Answers. + Heading - Writer’s address. - Date + Opening: Dear ......., + Body of the letter + Closing..

(344) - Explain the requirement of the writing. - Guide sts how to write a letter.. - Let them do in a few mins. - Call sts to write the letter on the board. (about 2 sts ). - Correct the mistakes and ask sts to copy. 10. 3. Post-writing - Ask ss write the other letter base on the cue. - Ask ss do about 5 minutes. - Call some ss do. 2.Write a letter about your neighborhood: Dear Long, I live in a house in SLa . It’s not a big house with 4 rooms : a living room, 2 bed rooms, a kitchen. Outside the window of my room is a park , the park has a lot of tree and flower . My house is about 2 km from school, so I go to school by bike. In my neighborhood there is a swimming pool& stadium. In the summer we always play soccer in the stadium and then we swim in the pool. Is there a library in your neighborhood long? what things is in your neighborhood you like best? write me soon. your friend. Adress:……….str. Date: month,date,year. Dear………, I live in ………….a small/large town/village………………………… ……………………………………… I’d like to say goodbye now.I am looking forwards to hearing from you soon. Sincerely,/love from…….

(345) - T listen and correct their mistake. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. The reason why many people move to the city. Vocabulary and structure d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart vocabulary. Read the text and translate. Do exercises 7,8 in the work book. Prepare part write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ..................................................................................................................... Date of preparing:. Period. / 2012. 48. Date of teaching: 8A1: Date of teaching: 8A2: Date of teaching: 8A3: Date of teaching: 8A4:. /2012 /2012 /2012 /2012. UNIT 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS. 1. The aims of the lesson: a. Knowledge: b. Skills: c. Education: SS love their homeland 2. Preparation: a. Teacher: lesson plan, English 8-book, pictures, extra board b. Students: : review the grammar points and vocabulary 3. The stages of the lesson: a. Check the old lesson: 5’ * Warm up: 2’ b. The new lesson:.

(346) Time. Teacher’s actions. Students’ actions. c. Feed back: 2’ Resay the content of the lesson. The reason why many people move to the city. Vocabulary and structure d. Home work: 2’ Learn by heart vocabulary. Read the text and translate. Do exercises 7,8 in the work book. Prepare part write. REMARKS: Time: .................................................................................................................. Method: .............................................................................................................. Content: ......................................................................................................................

(347)

anh 8 full

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về